Cheap Book Store,
OF THE
UNxVERSnT
^;^/:lIFO:
JIDOCATIOH XXM; / ' ^^
GBl'
/0>/-'
J
i4^.
■^L^.
....
m.
^
.^*% ^^* ^ /
^
-ii
^^
Digitized by tine Internet Archive
in 2008 witii funding from
IVIicrosoft Corporation
http:'//www.arGliivfe.org/(jetails/englislisyntitholOOenglrich
ii^Vf "-""rfE
AN
ENGLISH SYNTITHOLOGY,
IN THREE BOOKS,
DEVELOPIIfO
THE CONSTRUCTIVE PRINCIPLES
OF
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE,
BY
APPROPRIATE POLYMORPH TERMS, USED IN THIS
SCIENCE ONLY; EACH FORM OF THE SAME
WORD HAVING BUT ONE MEANING.
BY JAMES BROWN.
Is it more difficult to teach truth tlxan error "i and is it more useful to learn error
than truth I
In Grammar, aa well as in other sciences, technical terms appropriate in them-
selves, having but one specific meaning, and that accurately defined, are much more
convenient and useful than any other terms can be. — Rev. P. Bullions, D. D., Pro-
fessor of Languages in the Albany Academy ; .Author of Principles of English Qram-
mar ; Principles of Latin Orammar ; and Principles of Chreek Grammar.
BOOK III.
Second Edition .
PHILADELPHIA :
PUBLISHED BY HENRY GRUBB,
AND SOLD BY W. A. LEARY, No. 158 N. SECOND ST.
1847.
srocATioi Msa;
BOTH SYSTEMS ILLUSTRATED.
I. The technical terms of the Old Theory, as is demonstrated in
the Appeal.
II. The principles of the Old Theory, as is demonstrated iii
the Appeal.
I. The technical terms of the New System, as is demonstrated m
the Appeal.
II. The principles of the New System, as is demonstrated in
the Appeal.
n
[Entehed according to act of Congress, in the year 1847, by JAMES BROWN,
In the Clerk's Office of the district Court, of the Eastern District of Pennsylvania.]
From the Camden DemdiiM. ' ^
«AN ENGLISH SYNTITHOLOGY IN THREE BOOKS Bif ^'
JAMES BROWN, PUBLISHED BY H. GRUBB, AND SOLI
BY W. A. LEARY. No 158, N. Second Street.
This work, as the title page indicates, is a complete " develop-
ment of the constructive principles of the English Language," and
taken in connection with the author's " Appeal from the old British
theory of English Grammar," will be esteemed by every intelligent,
and disinterested teacher, as the most luminous, and intelligible view
^, which has ever been presented of this important subject All the
"' absurdities of the Murray theory as amended, and patched by Kirk-
ham, Greenleaf, Goold Brown, John Frost, B. Frazee, John S. Hart,
&c., &c., are fully exposed — the metajAysical nonsense in which
these compilers have enveloped the subject of English Grammar, is
entirely exploded, and that which, by their clumsy manipulations, is
rendered a mass of confusion, and unintelligible jargon, odious and
even frightful to the pupil, and vexatious to the conscientious
teacher, has been, under the plastic operations of a comprehensive
mmd, presented in these books, in a new, beautiful, and perfect form,
well worthy of the name of System.
To this new production Mr. Brown has given the appropriate, and
significant title of "Polymorph System," to distinguish it from
,.the old English Grammar which he denominates the " Monomorph
Theory." This distinction will strike those who examine it, as
^judicious, and convenient. And the entire change in the nomencla-
ture will appear but a natural result of Brown's perfect develop-
ment of the constructive principles of the English Language, which
are not reached by the old technicals. The arrangement of these
principles into a beautiful, and harmonious system, renders the new
nomenclature not only expedient, but essential. And, as Mr. Brown
has made it " appropriate, brief, and easy," there can be no just ground
for its rejection.
To obviate any objection that may arise in the mind of one attach-
ed to the old absurd terms, the author has given the definitions
of the Murray "Parts of Speech," and a " Technical Concordance,"
in which the old, and the new nomenclature, are placed in juxta posi-
tion ; so that it seems impossible for a pupil to become acquainted with
Mr. Brown's system, and remain ignorant of that which it should by
all means supersede.
We commend this work to the early, and diligent attention of
teachers, and School directors in New Jersey. W. A. Learv adver-
tises to fiimish any teacher who wishes to examine it, with ^ipy of
the "Abridgement of Books I. and II, together with a she'et^ con-
cisely, and clearly illustrating the first principles of the work, and
the method of prosecuting the study.
L February 24th. 1847.
BROWFS ENGLISH SYNTITHOLOGY,
IN THREE BOOKS.— BOOKS I, AND II ABRIDGED.
CHAMBER OF THE CONTROLLERS OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS, FIRST
SCHOOL DISTRICT OF PENNSYLVANIA
Philadelphia, September 15th, 1842.
At a meeting of the Controllers of Public Schools, First School
District of Pennsylvania, held at the Controllers' Chamber, on Tues-
day, September 13th, 1842, the following resolution was adopted ;
Resolved, That permission be given to such of the Teachers of the
Public Schools as desire it, to form classes for the purpose of instruc-
tion in Brown's System of English Grammar, as an experimental
trial; the books to be supplied at the cost of the pupils of said
classes.f
Certified from the Minutes,
THOMAS B. FLORENCE, Secretary.
To James BRowifr, Esq.
« Philadelphia, January, 1835.
« Bitter complaints are made by critics and philosophers, in Great
Britain, of the insufficiency of their English Grammars. ' They are
compilations,' says the Edinburgh Review, * silly rules, crowding the
memory, and debasing the understanding of the pupil — a jargon of
nickname definitions, the learning of which is a mere ad captandum
ceremony, making a parrot of the pupil to delight his grandmother,
and to give notoriety to his schoolmaster and academy.' * * * *
« Brown is, emphatically, a grammarian. He has invaded this pro-
vince of philosophy, and made it his own by conquest.
"JOHN SANDERSON,"
Late Professor of Languages in the Philadelphia Central High School.
Extract from the Franklin School Committee.
BosToir, February 1st, 1842.
" The quarterly examination of the Franklin School was made by
all the members of the Sub-Committee, on the 27th of January.
« The condition of the school is highly satisfactory. Both depart-
ments are under excellent discipline, and a great degree of interest
is manifest by all the scholars, particularly by those of the higher
classes.
t- "The introduction of Brown's First Book of his System of Eng-
lish Syntithology, it is thought by the grammar master, has been
attended with very beneficial results, and so far as your Committee
can judge from a brief examination, they fully concur with the mas-
ter, ^le scholars verily believe that it has made grammar as inter-
esting^ any other study of the school.
« All of which is respectfully submitted.
OTIS A. SKINNER, Chairman.
Read and accepted. — A true copy.
Attest— S. F. M'CLEARY, Secretary:'
t This Resolution is 0till in force.
Stereotyped by R. P. Jdoffridge, Philad'a.'] [J. Van Court, Printer^
m
introduction I -
Introduction II.
Introduction III. - ■*
Syntithology
Parts iir Book I. - -
Parts in Book II. "
Parts in Book III.
Syn-di-col-o-gy
Limitation of monos ^
Induology of Monos
Antilogue Indutory
Ap-o-logue Indutory
Grad-u-logue Indutory
Ca-this-e-logue Indutory
Op-to-logue Indutory
Hy-per-logue Indutory
Ec-pho-ne-logue Indutory
€rno-me'logue Indutory
An-a-logue Indutory
Am-il'logue Indutory
Gno-mo-logue Indutory
Pan-te-logue Indutory
Me-ro-logue Indutory
I-ron-i-logue Indutory
Sy-an-a-logue Indutory
Ne-them-e-logue Indutory
Specimen of analysis
CONTENTS.
Page.
3
9
18
. 47
48
49
50
52
52
57
62
63
64
65
65
66
66
67
67
G8
69
70
71
W 72
^72
72
74
CHAPTER III.
CONDICTION - - -
Division of cordiction - -
Rudiction^ E-diction, Ex-e-diction
Specimen in the appropriation of monos
Nepoeclad condiction - -
About - - - -
Above . - _ .
After
78
84
84
87
88
88
(1)
11 CONTENTS.
Across - - - ^ - - - 90
Amidf amidst ------ 90
Amongf amongst -^ - - - - - 91
Aroundf round - - . - , - - - 91
At ------ 91
Athwart ------ 93
behind - - - - - - - 94
Below - -.'-- - - 96
Beneath - - -- - - -96
Beside, besides - - - - - 96
Beyond -------98
By - - - - - - 99
Down - - - - - - - 105
From - - ----- - - 105
In - - - - - - - 106
Into ' - - - - - - 110
Of 1-112
On - - - - - - - 112
Over - - - . - - - - 112
Past - - . - , - - - 122
Through ------- 123
Throughout - - - . - - - 126
To, unto - - - . - - - - 126
Toward, towards - - „ - - - 133
Under - - - - - - - 134
Underneath - - . - . - - - 141
Up - - i - - - - - 141
Upon, on - - - . - - - 142
Within ------- 151
Atween, atwixt ----- 153
Between, betwixt ------ 154
Against - -..-.-- - 154
For ------- 156
Of - - - - - - - 166
With 194
Without - - . - . - . 212
Exercises in the condictions of monos - - - . 215
'^
INTRODUCTION I
The study of Syndicology is an excellant discipline for the mind :
the student is here constantly comparing, contrasting, reasoning, and
judging. In these exercises, he is unremittingly examining the retor-
tion of ideas. And, as this relation is the true basis of all just con-
clusions, whatever tends to^ the attention upon it, must hold a high
rank as a means of maturing the mind.
To one who desires to become thoroughly acquainted with the true
relation of ideas, the study of Syndicotogy is interesting, and invalua-
ble. But, to him who has no wish to become deeply skilled in this
relation, the beauties of Syndicology are mere colors to the blind man.
In the study of Syndicology, the attention of the pupil is given, not
so much to the mere framework relation of word with word, and mono
with mono, as to the rtietorical, and logical connection of idea with idea.
Hence Syndicology not only begets a taste for the study of Language,
but it gives a capacity to understand, and use it : it employs all the
faculties of the mind to their full extent. And, while it may be clearly
comprehended even by children, it is not unworthy of the close atten-
tion of men, of scholars, of philosophers. But the study of Syndi-
cology is not the work of a day. To become familiar with this branch
of Syntithology, demands a practice induced by a philological affec-
tion which nothing but Syndicology itself can beget, nourish, and
mature.
A capacity to distinguish the different parts of speech in English,
the different cases, and genders of nouns, and the different modes, and
tenses of verbs, never has enabled a man to use the English Language
with propriety. The tenability of this position may be placed beyond
all doubt by the many gross errors which all the old-school gram-
marians commit even in their studied productions. No man can use
this Language aright, without a critical knowledge of the exact rela-
tion of ideas. And, as Syndicology is the only medium through
which a critical knowledge of this relation can be acquired, the study
of this part of English Syntithology, becomes important to all.
I have long been satisfied that the old Murray theory of English
grammar, renders little, or no aid in the use of any Language. To
prove this, I deem it my duty to embrace every opportunity to make
exposures of the numerous solecisms which mar the writings of the
most distinguished old-school grammarians of this, and other coun-
tries. Under this impression, I embrace the opportunity afforded by
the publication of this book, to make a few reflections upon some
of the many errors which pervade the writings of Joseph R. Chawu-
lER, Editor of the U. S. Gazette. This gentleman is distinguished
4 INTRODrCTlON.
in Philadelphia for his knowledge of English Grammars. And, if I
am not under a wrong impression, there are individuals among us,
who verily believe that he is deeply skilled in English grammar itself.
But while I freely admit that he is familiarly acquainted with many
Grammar books, I feel constrained to deny that he has much know-
ledge of grammar itself. And to sustain this position, I have here
exposed a few of the many errors which deform his writings.
Mr. Chandler is the author of the following notice :
"New Books. — Mr. Leary, southwest corner of Se-
cond and New street, has recently published an edition
of Mr. James Brown's English Grammar, a work that
bears testimony to its author's deep and successful re-
search, and to his ability as a grammarian. We have
used more than one occasion to speak of Mr. Brown's
philological attainments ; and though we cannot agree
with him in his nomenclature, we do justice to his abili-
ties and to the results at which he arrives." — United
States Gazette, 1847.
After a critical analysis of this notice, I have come to the con-
clusion that it exhibits much evidence of a want of capacity in Mr.
Chandler to write with grammatical precision.
As Mr. Leary is not a wetu book why should he be treated of imme-
diately after the head, "New Books 1" As Mr. Chandler does not
intend to give a notice of Mr. Leart/, but of a book published by him,
why should he be made the first, and central object of attention? It
does not seem to me that this arrangement is either grammatical, or
logical. The following is something better :
New Books. — James Brown's English Grammar has
recently been published by Mr, Leary, Southwest corner
of Second and JVew street.
Under this arrangement, the Grammar has its proper place, and
legitimate rank. ^
"a work that bears testimony to its author's deep and
successful research, and to his ability as a grammarian."
" bears testimony to its author's deep and successful
research, and to his ability as a grammarian."
«' Testimony'^ is here improperly used for evidence. This is ren-
dered quite obvious from the consideration that ''testimony" is from
the Latin, testis, a witness.
Where the subject is moral or intellectual, evidence, not testimony,
should be used ; as, " Of Swift's general habits of thinking, if his
letters can be supposed to afford any evidence, he was not a man to be
INTRODUCTION. 5
either loved or envied." — JoHsrsoif. "All that our Saviour did and
said were evidences of his Divine character." — Crabb.
The substitution of testimcni/ for evidence would be an obvious sole-
cism :
All that our Saviour did and said were testimonies of his Divine
character.
" bears testimony to its author's deep and successful
research."
As there is nothing in bear, which demands to, this particle should
give place to of. To bear testimony is to show, exhibit, or utter testi-
mony. Hence the idea expressed by Mr. Chandler is this :
a work that shows, exhibits, or utters testimony to the author's
research ! ! ! The substitution of of for to will show that Mr. Chan-
dler has worn the regal tonsure somewhat unworthily :
"a work which bears testimony of its author's deep
research."
That is, which bears testimony in favour of its author's deep
research.
" Hence a person makes another a present, or performs
any other act of kindness as a testimony of (not te) his
regard." — CrAbb.
Persons, or things personified, bear testimony in favor of persons.
— Cbabb. V
" The same came for a witness to bear witness of the
light." (not to.)
"He was not that Light, but was sent to bear witness o/that Light."
(not to.)
But Mr. Chandler may attempt to justify this use of to by showing
that other writers have committed the same error ! I presume that
the authority of Dryden himself may be found on the side of this
solecism. But the sins of Dryden will never sanctify the eniquities
of Mr. Chandler! If Mr. Chandler can show that to utter testimony
to a person, is synonymous with, to utter it of a person, he can justify
the use of to, without the blunders of others.
**a work that bears testimony to its author's deep and
successful research, and to his ability as a grammarian."
The use of to before his, is a repetition of the error which makes
Mr. Chandler say that the testimony in favor of the research was
addressed to the research !
The word "ability'' is improperly used for capacity. Capacity, says
Crabb, is a mental endowment, and always supposes something ready
to receive or hold:
1*
6 INTRODUCTION.
The object is too big for our capacity when we would comprehend
the circumference of a world. — Addisox.
We say an able commander — but a capacious mind.
A ^vedii capacity of thought. — Crabb.
Sir Francis Bacon's capacity (not ability) seemed to have grasped
all that was in books before. — Hughes.
That '^ability" may be applied to the mind in the sense of capacity^
is not denied. But when it is so applied, it should generally be
plural :
"As for me, my abilities, if ever I had any, are not
what they were." — Atterbury.
But I consider the clause, **and to his ability as a grammarian," a
pleonasm.
"a work that bears testimony to its author's deep and
successful research, and to his ability as a grammarian."
(Nineteen words.)
Corrected, a work which awards evidence of deep grammatical
research. (Ten words — nine redundant words.)
The next, which is the concluding part of this notice of my book,
reads as follows :
"We have used more than one occasion to speak of
Mr. Brown's philological attainments; and 'though we
cannot agree with him in his nomenclature, we do justice
to his abilities, and to the results at which he arrives."
A want of space prevents me from making many comments. I
shall confine my attention, therefore, to the mere correction of the
several errors which render this sentence strikingly analogous to its
predecessor.
" We have used more than one occasion.''^
Was the occasion used by these gentlemen 1 Who used the occa-
sion 1 We use pens, dishes, money, &c. But we speak on occasions.
The word, occasion, however, is improperly used for opportunity.
What Mr. Chandler intends to say, is.
We have embraced more than one opportunity to speak of Mr.
Brown's philological attainments. But if Mr, Chandler is unwilling
to exchange occasion for opportunity, the sentence may read as
follows :
We have spoken of Mr. Brown's philological attainments on more
than one occasion. Or, We have spoken, on more than one occasion,
of Mr. Brown's philological attainments. It is a fact, then, that Mr.
Chandler who has for years worn the Royal robes in the kingdom of
grammar, employs "used" for on /// But the use of occasion is bom-
bastic, and redundant. The sentence, therefore, may be improved by
the omission of on and occasion :
INTRODUCTION. ^ 7
We have spoken more than once of Mr. Brown's philological
attainments.
and though we cannot agree with hirn in his nomenclature, we do
justice to his abilities, and to the results at which he arrives.
We have used more than one occasion to speak" of Mr. Brown's
philological attainments ; and we do justice to his abilities, and to the
results at which he arrives!!
I am under the impression that all who wish to comprehend the
connection between these two members of this sentence, will be com-
pelled to seek the gratification of their desires through Mr. C.'s late
Grammar ! ! ! Is it possible that Mr. Chandler has undertaken to
express in the preceding sentence, what is conveyed in the following:
We have used more than one occasion to speak of Mr. Brown's
philological attainments, and on each,we /tauc endeavored to do justice
to his abilites, and to the results at which he arrives.
Mr. Chandler speaks of results as objects which can be approached
like trees, houses, rocks, ships, 4-c. From his manner of speaking, no
one who is ignorant of the nature of a result, would infer that a result
is that which is produced by the exertions of him who, according to
Mr. C. arrives atiil From this part of the sentence the reader must
infer that the result is a thing which may be far ahead of him who
produces it ! Besides, the word, result, conveys the idea oi aiermina-
lion, 2. final stop — but arrives at imports a mere temporary pause ! ! By
the use of "arrives at" in the following expression, the speaker indi-
cates that his journey does not terminate at Philapelphia, and that he
expects to continue it from this city :
" I arrived at Philadelphia last evening."
Now, if the word, Philadelphia, implied the termination of the
speaker's journey, with what propriety could "arrived af^ be used with
this proper name 1
**and we do justice to his abilities, and to the results
at which he arrives.''^
Corrected: and we do justice to his abilities, and to the results of
his labor.
" though we cannot agree with him in his nomencla-
ture."
Is not the nomenclature one of the results 1 Certainly. And Mr.
Chandler does justice to this result by pronuncing against it, without
conveying the slightest allusion to any defectiveness in iti !
"we cannot agree with him in his nomenclature."
This condemnation which is rendered absolute from its source, bears
a striking analogy in its grammatical character, to the other parts of
this notice. In it, the writer says that he cannot agree in nomencla'
ture ! Although this notice by Mr. Chandler, abounds with mistakes,
the most striking one is found in the fact that the author of it should
8 INTRODUCTION.
set himself up as a. Judge of nomenclatures. Even the very sentence
in which he gives judgment against the technical terms of my system,
demonstrates that he is totally incompetent to form a just opinion of
any part of grammar. He says that he cannot agree in nomenclatvre
with me. A common man would say,
We cannot agree with himrespecting tea. But the Bashaw himself
says,
We cannot agree with him i7i tea . .
We cannot agree with him in his nomenclature.
Corrected. We cannot agree with him respecting his nomenclature.
I. The notice in its original form.
" New Books. — Mr. Leary, Southwest corner of Se-
cond and New street, has recently published an edition
of Mr. James Brown's English Grammar, a work that
bears testimony to its author's deep and successful
research, and to his ability as a grammarian. We have
used more than one ofccasion to speak of Mr. Brown's
philological attainments ; and though we cannot agree
with him in his nomenclature, we do justice to his abili-
ties, and to the results at which he arrives." [Seventy-
nine words.]
II. In its revised form.
New Books. — Mr. James Brown's English Grammar. (Leary,
Southwest corner of Second and New street.)
We think well of the philological attainments of Mr. Brown, and
verily believe that his works afford evidence of deep research; but
we do not like his nomenclature. [Forty-three words.]
As the difference between seventy-nine, and forty-three, is thirty-six,
and, as the notice in both forms is the same in substance, Mr.
Chandler has employed thirty-six redundant words ? What would Mr.
C. think of a tailor, who, in making him a coat, should use double the
quantity of cloth which his size requires? And what would Mr. C
do with this coat, if, while some of its parts should be made of
improper materials, others should be placed in improper positions!?
Would he refuse to accept of the garment, or would he receive it ! 1
and, if he should take it, would he keep it as a curiosity, or would he
wear it as an ornament .' ? Was such an article to fall into my hands,
I readily admit that I should esteem it highly — I should wish to
keep it for the accuracy with which it would portray the construction
of hundreds of Mr. C.'s other paragraphs. But I should feel a greater
interest in the tailor himself— I should endeavor to couple i\ns prince
of the shears with the king of grammar, and exhibit the two as a
brace of phenomena in the climax of curiosities !
INTRODUCTIONII.
Within a few weeks, several new works on the art of Eng-
lish grammar have been published in this city. It has fallen to
my lot to examine them all, and from the impression which
they have left on my mind, I feel somewhat prepared to appre-
ciate the paragraph which the editors of the Ledger apply to
the numerous compilers of English grammars.
" The grammarians of our language, some of whom know
little, and others nothing of the philosophy of any language,
divide but into two parts of speech, a preposition and a conjunc-
tion. They then define a preposition to be a word, without
independent signification, placed before another word, showing
some connection between it and some other word in the same
sentence ; and they define a conjunction to be a word without
independent signification, used to denote some relation between
two other words or members of a sentence. With these lights
they leave their pupils to find their way ; and considering the
brightness of the lights, we need not wonder at the mistakes
of the poor pupils." — Ledger.
Within a few hours a book has been placed in my hands, of
which the following is the title page :
" English Grammar : or an exposition of the principles
and usages of the English language. By John S. Hart, A.
M., Principal of the Philadelphia High School, and member of
the American Philosophical Society. Philadelphia, published
by E. H. Butler & Co., 1845."
That the Principal of the Philadelphia High School is em-
barrassed by the darkness v/hich the Ledger ironically calls lights
is obvious from the numerous errors which mar this title page.
As the phrase " English Grammar'^ is the name of the
science itself, it should not be applied to the book which treats
of this science. An English Grammar means a book ; but
" English Grammar^^ signifies, not the book, but the science
on which the book treats.
3
4 INTRODUCTION.
"The principles and usages of the English language."
Are not the usages of the English language its principles ?
"In language, usage is the foundation of all rules,'''' — Webster,
Does not the word 'principles^ then, embrace as much as
principles, and usages ? Has Mr. Hart even attempted to show
the difference between the principles and the usages of the
English language ? Perhaps by " usages" he intends to dis-
tinguish between the true principles of the English language
and the manner in which he uses it ! If so, the difference
between principles and usages is strikingly illustrated through
his whole book,
" An exposition of the principles and usages of the English
language."
Can the word usage, be applied to the thing used ? Does
the usage pertain to the instrument used, or to the agent that
uses it ? Can we speak of the usages of knives, and forks ?
Mr. Webster defines usage as follows :
"Usage, treatment, use, or long continued use; custom
practice.'*
The substitution of the word practice, for usages, will clearly
show that Mr. Hart's use of usages is very ill usage !
"Principal of the Philadelphia High School, and member of
the American Philosophical Society."
By the omission of a before member, Mr. Hart indicates that
the relation which he bears to the American Philosophical
Society is similar to that which he bears to the Philadelphia
High School.
" Principal of the Philadelphia High School, and member of
the American Philosophical Society."
As principal is without a, and imports an official relation,
so member, when used without this particle, and in connection
with principal, must express the same species of relation !
Principal of the High School, and President of the Philoso-
phical Society.
Henry Clay was then Secretary of State, not a Secretary.
Principal of the High School, and teacher of the Model
Grammar School.
Does not the omission of a before teacher clearly indicate
T- INTRODUCTION. 5
hat the Principal of the High School is the only teacher of the
Model Grammar School ? By the omission of a, then, before
member, Mr. Hart has not only represented himself as an
officer of the American Philosophical Society, but he has repre-
sented himself as the only member of the Society ! !
^^ English Grammar, by John S. Hart- — Principal of the
Philadelphia High School, and member of the American Philoso-
phical Society."
By the omission of an before English, Mr. Hart uninten-
tionally makes himself the author of the very science of Eng-
lish Grammar — and by the omission of a before member, he
makes the American Philosophical Society to consist solely of
himself!! That these philological displays are not the true
principles, but the mere usages, of the Enghsh language, cannot
be doubted by any enlightened member of this community.
The following substitute is constructed according to the 'prin-
ciples, not the usages, of the English language :
An Enghsh Grammar — By John S. Hart, A. M., Principal
of the Philadelphia High School, and a member of the American
Philosophical Society.
Are the numerous solecisms which pervade the periods of
those who use the English language, ascribable to an ignorance
of the old theory of English Grammar, or are they attributable
to the unsoundness of the theory itself?
In Mr. Hart's ^'Exposition of the principles and usages
of the English language," I find the following definition of
Grammar : —
" Grammar is the science of language^
Now, if the old theory of English Grammar is a full devel-
opment of the science of the English language, why do they
who adopt this theory entirely disregard the true genius of the
English language in their writings ? The following is the first
sentence of the preface of Mr. Hart's English Grammar : —
" Four kinds of type are used in the following pages to indi-
cate the portions that are considered more or less elementary."
The ill arrangement of the several parts of this sentence,
renders it clumsy. The following is something better : —
To indicate the portions that are considered more, or less
elementary, four kinds of type are used.
INTRODUCTION.
" Four kinds of type are used in the following pages to indi
cate the portions that are considered more or less elementary.
The use of indicate indicates that Mr. Hart does not know
the difference between the words indicate^ and distinguish.
"To indicate is to point out, to show. Thus, fermentation
indicates a certain degree of heat in a liquor. A heavy swell
of the sea in calm weather, often indicates a storm at a dis-
tance." — Webster.
But to distinguish is to separate one from another, or §ome
from others : The farmer distinguishes his sheep by marking
their ears. — Webster.
But does the farmer indicate his sheep by marking their ears ?
" Four kinds of type are used in the following pages, to indi-
cate the portions that are considered more or less elementary."
The use of portions indicates that Mr. Hart does not distin-
guish between a portion, and a part.
" A page, a line, or a word, is a part of any book. Portion,
and share are particular species of divisions, which are said of
such matters as are assignable to individuals." — Crabb.
That portion is not synonymous with part, may be seen by
a substitution oi portion for part in the following instances :
1. The apple was divided into two parts. ' • -
2. The apple was divided into two portions /
1. " All the parts were formed in his mind into one harmoni-
ous body." — Locke.
2. All the portions were formed in his mind into one har-
monious body !
1. " The component parts of a fossil."
2. The component portions of a fossil !
1. The people stood at the nether part of the mount. — Ex.
XIX.
2. The people stood at the nether portion of the mount .^^
1. He visited various parts of America.
2. He visited various portions of America.
" Four kinds of type are used in the following pages to indi-
cate the portions that are considered more or less elementary."
INTRODUCTION. 7
.r Four kinds of type are used to distinguish the yarts which
are considered more or less elementary.
[In, the, follovnng, pages — indicate, portions.)
A substitute. — The parts which are considered more, or less
elementary, are distinguished by different kinds of type.
The following is the second sentence of the same preface :
" The most important rules and definitions are printed in
large type, italicized."
Do we print in, or on type ? Do we italicize type !
The omission of ^^ printed^'' would improve the sentence:
" The most important rules and definitions are in large type,
italicised."
Italicise, to distinguish a word by printing it in Italic charac-
ters. — Dr. Parr. — Todd's Johnson.
The substitution of characters for type, will not only correct
this gross error, but will demonstrate that Mr. Hart does not
understand that science which he defines to be the science of
language :
The most important rules, and definitions are printed in large
characters, italicised.
A substitute. — The most important rules and definitions are
in large italic characters, (pririted, type, italicised,)
From the same preface.
" By this arrangement the author has been enabled to enter
more at length than is usually done, upon difliicult and important
points." Who is the author ? John S. Hart, A. M. And
who is John S. Hart, A. M. ? He is the author of English
Grammar, Principal of the Pliiladelphia High School, and
Member of the American Philosophical Society !
As Mr. Hart is all this — and, as he understands not only the
principles but the usages of the English language, I presume
that he may be asked to parse the word "is," which follows
"i/mn/"
" By this arrangement the author has been enabled to enter
more at length than is usually done, upon diflicuh and import-
ant points." The nominative to "u'" can be found neither in
nor out of this sentence! The nominative case to "is," is
not — it does not exist! This use of "is" is one of the usages
8 INTRODUCTION.
of the English language ! ! If the old theory of English gram-
mar is good for any thing, why does not its worth appear in the
writings of those who understand it ? That Mr. Hart under-
stands this old theory cannot be doubted for a moment. What!
the author of a science not understand it ? It cannot be. A
sculptor in Lisbon was visited in his dying moments by a monk,
to confess him. As the monk held the crucifix before the
dying sculptor's eyes, he exclaimed, " See, here is God, whom
you have so often offended — do you Itnow him?^^ " O, yes,"
replied the sculptor, "for I made him myself/"
Had I the strength of him who bore away the gates of Gaza,
I would exert it, not to harm Mr. Hart, but to benefit my fellow
men. I am satisfied that the old theory of English grammar is
a preventive against the acquisition of the true constructive
principles of the English language. To sustain this position 1
have undertaken to demonstrate that they who understand this
theory hesf ■,wnie the worst, A man writes well in proportion
to the degree of attention which he has given to the true struc-
ture of the language in which he writes. That Mr. Hart has
given much more attention to the old theory of English grammar
than to the true structure of the English language is obvious
from his incapacity to use this language with grammatical pro-
priety. In the following sentence there are several errors
which no one who understands the true constructive genius of
our language would be liable to commit, and which no one who
understands the old theory of English grammar only, is able to
correct :— •
" The distinction here insisted on is as old as Aristotle, and
should not be lost sight of."
To rid this sentence of its unnecessary prolixity, this should
be substituted for " the ;"
This distinction is as old as Aristotle, and should not be lost
sight of.
(Redundant words — here, insisted, and on.)
The next solecism which I shall notice, lies in connecting
should with is:
" The distinction here Insisted on is as old as Aristotle, and
s/iow/t? not be lost sight of."
To repair this infraction nothing is necessary but to give the
sentence a natural construction :
INTRODUCTION. «&--. 9
This distinction, which is as old as Aristotle, should not be
lost sight of.
" The distinction here insisted on, is as old as Aristotle, and
should not be lost sight of."
The main proposition is, the distinction should not be lost
sight of. But Mr. Hart, although " member of the American
Philosophical Society," so constructs the sentence that the
main proposition is degraded to a mere minor, and a mere minor
is promoted to the major ! !
The distinction here insisted on, is as old as Aristotle, and
should not be lost sight ofJ*^
The phrases, " here insisted on,^"* and " lost sight of,^^ are
prominent blemishes. That is bombast; this is contortion.
Perhaps the following sentence, although not a paragon of
excellence, is quite as good as that under consideration : —
Of this distinction, which is as old as Aristotle, the gram-
marian should never lose sight.
Or,
The grammarian should never lose sight of this distinction,
which is as old as Aristotle himself.
" The distinction here insisted on, is as old as Aristotle, and
should not be lost sight ofJ'^
" The distinction is as old as Aristotle."
The expression of was after " Aristotle," must somewhat
diminish the pleasure which the advocates of Hart's Grammar
feel in recommending this work to popular favor :
The distinction here insisted on, is as old as Aristotle was! !
I presume that the Aristotle of whom mention is here made,
must be he who was a disciple of Plato, and who founded the
sect of Peripatetics. This distinguished philosopher was born
384 years before Christ. He died at the age of 63. This
distinction, therefore, which Mr. Hart thinks he has represented
to be as ancient as the days of Aristotle, turns out, by the use
of old for ancient, to be but 63 years of age ! ! The distinction,
then, was first made in 1782 ! This important "distinction,"
consequently, is not quite so hoary as the author of English
gram.mar has attempted to make it!
" The distinction here insisted on, is as old as Aristotle {was,)
and should not be lost sight of."
2
10 INTRODUCTION.
A Substitute. — Of this distinction, which is as ancient as
Aristotle, the grammarian should never lose sight.
This sentence, which is a ray of light from the very top of
the High School, is sufficient to show every man his duty.
Words are artful things— to prevent them from playing off their
tricks upon him who uses them, they must be watched with
great care and skill. They have hoaxed even the Principal of
ihe High School in his very title page — they have deceived
him in every sentence of his Preface — and even in the very
paragraph before me, these hypocrites, if I may so call them,
have, by concealing their real characters, trifled with his learn-
ing, his philosophy, and even his station, with the utmost im-
punity. I apprehend that the words in the English language
will continue to be edge tools in the hands of children, till some
one who is thoroughly acquainted with the ^^ usages^ ^ of them
shall have invented what, for the want of a name, I must call a
Logrometerj by which their real characters can be measured
with exactness.
It has long been a contested point whether language is a
human production, or a Divine revelation. And, although I do
not pretend to know which side has the preponderance, either
of numbers, or logic, yet I prefer to range myself with the advo-
cates of the doctrine, that language is an emanation from men.
Was language an emanation from God, nothing but an ignorance
of this fact, could expiate the crime of sacrilege, which Mr. Hart
would commit in the following sentence :
" What is the difference of meaning between the short and
long forms of this word ?"
The following construction will show that " of" before
*' meaning,''^ is improperly used :
What is the difference between the short and long forms of
this w^ord, of meaning ?! I
The use of in for of would expurgate this noxious part of
the sentence :
What is the difference in meaning between the short and long
forms of this word ?
That in is the proper word for this place, is rendered clear
by the construction which proves that of is an improper one :
What is the difference between the short and long forms of
tliis word, in meaning ?
*. ?;
INTRODUCTION. 1 1
Now, if language is a direct emanation from the Divine Being,
what a gross infraction is this philological blemish ? But lan-
guage has little of the sacredness which it would have, was it a
direct gift from God to man. Language may be abused — and
Mr. Hart, although the author of" English Grammar ,'''' seems*
made to abuse it !
" What is tlie difference of meaning between the short and
long forms of this word ?"
" The short and long forms."
By the omission of the before long, Mr. Hart has made each
form both short, and long ! !
This may be illustrated so clearly that even Mr. Hart liin)-
self can comprehend it :
1 . The hlack and white ox.
Here there is but one ox.
2. The black, and the white ox.
Here there are two — one is black— the other white.
The seven black, and white oxen.
^ Here each ox is partially black, and partially white.
Mfi But, if we say — The seven black, and the white oxen, -we
have seven which are entirely black, and two, or more which
are entirely white.
1. The seven black, and white oxen.
3. The seven black, and the white oxen are sold.
The old and new testament.
That is, the testament which is both, old and new.
He has read the old, and the new testament.
Here there are two testaments — one is old — the other, new.
" What is the diff'erence of meaning between tlie short and
long forms of this word ?'*
i. " The «^or< and Zon^ forms."
2. The hlaclc and white oxen.
1. The hlack and white ox.
2. The short and long form ! !
That an ox can be hlack and whiter is quite generally
admitted — but that the same form can be both short and long^ is
not so generally conceded ! ! To one who is not member of a
12 INTRODUCTION^.
Philosophical society, the rationale of this phenomenon, is not
so obvious.
" What is the difference of meaning between the short and
long forms of this word ?"
A Substitute,
What is the difference in meaning between the short, and the
long form of this word.
Under the same page I find the following ;
" In course of time it became abreviated into its present form."
" In course of time it," &c.
Is this English ? If so, the following is English :
In course of a year, he became ill !
I do not think that the use of the before course, would be
contrary to any of the ^jrinciples of the English Language —
but I am somewhat apprehensive that it might contravene some
of the usages of it !
In the course of time, it became abreviated into its present
form.
" It became abreviated into its present form."
To speak of abreviating a thing into form, is to employ lan-
guage in a very singular form !
Would it not be somewhat better to say — In the course of
time one became a.
Or,
In the course of time, it assumed its present form.
Under the same page I find the following :
" One expresses the idea of unity with emphasis." ** A ex-
presses the same idea, only without emphasis."
I should be much pleased to see a technical disposition of the
word, onhj ! What can this word be called ? It is not an ad-
verb. Under page 90, Mr. Hart gives the following definition
of an adverb :
" An adverb is a word used to qualify a verb, adjective or
adverb."
But does only qualify a verb, an adjective, or an adverb ! t
He that can parse the word, only, as here used, deserves a
medal for his meed !
INTRODUCTION. 13
" One expresses the idea of unity with emphasis." " A ex-
presses the same idea, onli/ without emphasis !"
The following is something better :
One expresses unity with emphasis ; but a expresses it
without emphasis.
Let me now say a word, or two upon the doctrine of these
periods.
" One expresses the idea of unity with emphasis." " A ex-
presses the same idea, only without emphasis."
1. " One man followed me several miles."
2. " A man followed me several miles."
In the first, the idea is that one man only, followed me. In
the second, the idea is that a maUf not a dog, not a lionj not a
beary followed me.
In the first, the leading idea is the number of animals that
followed — in the second, the leading idea is the kind of animal
that followed.
That a has no reference to unity, is obvious from the answer
to the following question :
How many hats have you, John ?
I have a hat ! !
When the idea in the question turns upon the number^ one
must be used in the answer.
How many hats have you ?
I have one hat.
But where the idea in the question, turns upon the kind of
thing, a must be used in the answer ; as. What have you in
this case ? I have a hat.
" The diflTerence (between one and a) is this." " One ex-
presses the idea of unity with emphasis. A expresses it, only
without emphasis ! !"
" Could one man carry this weight ? No — but a man could
carry it !"
In the first, says Mr. Hart, there \a unity with emphasis.— -
In the second, there is unity without emphasis ! ! This, says
he, is the difference between a and one ! ! !
Could one man carry this weight ? No^ — but a horse could.
2*
14 INTRODUCTION.
A is so entirely destitute of number, that where unity is found
in the major part of the sentence, a can not be used in the minor.
This is obvious from tlie incongruity that is produced by
the use of one, and a in the above sentence which should be as
follows :
Can one man carry this weight ? No — but two can.
Or,
Can a man carry this weight? No — but a horse can.
I have already attempted to make a partial exposition of the
several errors which have found their way into the following
sentence :
" What is the difference of meaning between the short and
long forms of this word?"
I shall now undertake to expose the few solecisms that appear
more occult than they of which I have already relieved this
sentence.
" What is the difference of meaning between the short, and
the long form, of this word?"
" The short and long forms."
The word, ybrm, as here used, means shape. Hence a sub-
stitution of shape for form, will have a tendency to show the
eccentricity of the idea which Mr. Hart here expresses ;
The short and long shapes!
The notion of a short shape, is certainly sui generis ! Nor
do I know to what species, or genius, that of a long shape,
belongs ! Had Mr. Hart employed primitive, and derivative,
instead of short ■a.ndi long, he would have used words which have
some relation to forms :
What is the difference of meaning between the primitive, and
derivative forms of this word ?
That a short shape is a singular one, must be obvious to all.
But whether men, in general, can so readily see that " owe" is
2. form of a, is not so clear ! On page 32, Mr. Hart says,
" ^ or an was originally ae, ane or one. These words ae,
ane and one are the long form of a. And a is the short form
of ae, ane and one !
Mr. Hart wishes to express the parent relation which ae,
ane and one bear to a. But can this relation be expressed by
INTRODUCTION. 1 5
the word, '•^form I ?" Does the word, /orm, convey any allusion
to the relation which a mother, as such, bears to her offspring ! ?
Mr. Hart is not speaking of ihe forms, but of the etymology,
of a. The word, a, has two forms — One is a ; the other is an.
Can we speak of the Latin, verbum, as a form of the English
word, ve7'b ? Can it be said that " verbum^^ is the long form
of " »er6" — and that " verb" is the short form of verbum ! ? A
scholar would say that " verbum'^ is the etymon of " verb." But
would a scholar say that one is the long form ofa/f ? As well
may it be said that an ox is the large form of a calf — and that
^ calf is the small form of an ox ! !
" What is the difference of meaning between the short and
long forms of this word ?"
A substitute.
What is the difference in meaning between the etymon of a,
and a itself? Or — wherein does the meaning of a differ from
that of its etymon ?
The following is the title page of another work by Mr. Hart.
" Class Book of Poetry, consisting of selections from dis-
tinguished English and American Poets from Chaucer to the
present Day. By John S, Hart, A. M., Principal of the
Philadelphia High School, and member of the American
Philosophical Society." (1845,)
" From Chaucer to the present Day.^^
I have read of Chaucer ; and I have some knowledge of his
works — but of Mr. Day I am totally ignorant !
That he, and his works exist somewhere is obvious from the
fact that Mr. Hart mentions him in connection with Chaucer
himself ! Still, in Mr. Hart's whole Book, I have not been
able to find a line in prose, or verse, written by this honored
individual ! !
" From Chaucer to the present Day."
It may be that the Mr. Day whom Mr. Hart has here placed
by the side of Chaucer, is he who generally passes by the title
of Monday, Wednesday^ Age, Century, rm. Now, let it be supposed that in pro-
cess of time the Romans met with instances in which the ideas to be
expressed, are, in fact, similar to those of the sentence, « Fructum mi
hi," but that from a want of proper attention, they do not discover
the similarity, 2lX{A consequently, employ a different /brm of speech for
the expression of these similar ideas. Would this obliquity be usage,— ^
or a departure from usage ? In other words, would not this new form
of expression, arising from an ignorance of the true character of the
ideas, be a violation of the principles on which the sentence, " Fructum
mi /«, is constructed 1
« Fructum mi hi." That is, give me fruit.
Let it be supposed that one Roman desired to say to another, give
thou to me apen. But from an ignorance of the analogy between these
ideas, and those which are expressed in " Fructum mi hi," he used,
not pennam mi hi, but, mi hi pennam ,- and that mi hi pennam became
a common form of speech within the Roman dominions. Must not
mi hi pennam be the offspring of ignorance, and a departure from the
principles which enlightened usage had already sanctioned 1
Again. Let it be supposed that in 1840, the Supreme court of Penn-
sylvania from a partial ignorance of the exact legal character of a
particular case, departed from their numerous, and just decisions in
all similar cases. Would this unsound decision become the law of
the land 1 Would a Philadelphia lawyer urge this decision before a
lower court, as the law of Pennsylvania 1 He might, but he would do
it with a very ill grace, and to very little purpose. He would be met
by his opponent brother at the bar with the paramount argument that
this particular decision, is a departure from the great principles of
law on which all similar cases had been decided prior to 1840, by the
same tribunal. The Judge in his charge to the jury, would sustain
the rejoinder, and here would be an end of the question. Let me now
make an application of this principle to the case of X. Brown says
that, " / and he are" is not in accordance with the principles which
usage has established ; but an obvious departure from them. What
are the principles which usage has established in regard to the form
of the verb ? They are expressed in the following Rule.
" The verb must agree with its nominative case in number and per-
son" as, I am thou art, he is, they are.
"I and he are."
He is here placed in the nominative case to are. But as are isplural,
it does not agree with he which is singular. We ure, you are, and
INTRODUCTION. XVH
they are, is English. But neither I are, nor he are, is English. It is
a gross obliquity from English. This departure from the true genius
of the language, has arisen from the presumption that two singular
nouns, or pronouns, between which and is placed, are equal to one
plural noun, or pronoun. Under this false notion of the subject, gram-
marians use the plural verb with two singular nominatives, which
have and between them ; as, " /, and he are.'*
The ground taken by the old school grammarians, is that I, and he
are connected by and — hence they are taken together — and, as they
are taken together, they constitute 3l plural nominative.
X. is plain upon this point. — He says that « His (Brown's) error
arises from a disregard of the mental operation of grouping objects.
When it is said that — this chair, and that chair, are good chairs, the
mind, before it has employed words to express the thought, has con-
sidered them together, and has regarded them as two chairs." (X.)
I hope the readers of the Ledger, will do X. the justice to under-
stand, fully, this reasoning. There is certainly a high degree of inge-
nuity in the argument. What! is it necessary for the mind to bring
two chairs together, to make them two chairs ? ! Hear, hear — " The
mind, before it has employed words to express the thought, has con-
sidered them together, and has regarded them as two chairs ! ! " Were
there not two chairs before this very logical process ! 1 Did the
bringing of the chairs together multiply them from unity \o plurality ?
But why does X. resort to philosophy to sustain this form of expres-
sion ■? Does he not expressly declare that there is nothing but usage
which can make one form right, and another one wrong ! ] Hear,
hear. — " I have always thought that there was no appeal from the set-
tled usages of a language !" " There is nothing bat usage which makes
it proper to say in English, 1 love them, and in French, I them love! /"
(WhatFrtjncA.///)
But how does this doctrine of usage comport with ihe view which
he expresses in the very first sentence of his first article ]
« It is highly important that we should fully understand the princi-
ples on which the English Language is constructed ! !"
Language, then, is formed upon principles. Let us read X. with a
substitution of usage ior principles :
It is highly important that we should fully understand the usage on
which the English Language is constructed! ! "We are indebted to
Murray and others for what they have done towards reducing the dis-
order oil usage to system, but we ought to feel more indebted to James
Brown for his deeper exploration of this subject."
What subject 1 Why, the disorder of usage !.' ! Language has
principles — and usage should conform to them; but it never has
taken, nor do I believe it ever will take, the 77/ace of them.
Upon what does X. attempt to sustain the use of are after he in the
period — ^I, and he are? It is the curious doctrine that two chairs, or
other objects, are made two by taking them together. In other words,
4
XVlll INTRODUCTION.
that plurality becomes plurality, because the mind groups the objects t
But that the position, that, where two single objects are taken together,
the verb should be plural, can. not be sustained, is obvious from the
consideration that where with occurs the verb is singular.
1. John with his brother is coming, (not are.) Does not with indi-
cate that John is taken with his brother] Are not the two, then, taken
together ! ?
2. A watch with its chain haji been lost, (not have.)
But does not the mind take the watch, and the chain together ! ? Is
it in the power of X. to tell why this verb should not be plural 1 He
says that are should be used because the mind considers I and he toge-
ther ! Can he show that the mind does not take the watch and its
chain together ! ?
I deny the doctrine that and indicates that the objects are taken
together. For instance :
He purchased salt, and meai.
Is there any thing here which indicates that he purchased the salt
with the meati Nothing. He might have purchased the salt in 1812,
and the meat in 1844 !
. But where with is employed, we are compelled to take the articles
together.
He purchased salt with meat.
It seems, then, that where we are compelled, from the nature of the
expression, to take the single things together, the verb is singular !
As the character of the word, awrf, has an olavious bearing upon this
question, it may be well to undertake a particular development of it
in this place. Grammarians denominate and a conjunction. But as
the letter X. conceals the identity of my opponent, so does the word,
conjunction^ conceal the true character of and.
^'^And" says Webster, "is a conjunction connective, or conjoining
word." That the conjunctive character of and, may be well under-
stood, he gives the following illustration:
« John, and Peter, and James rode to New York. — that is, John rode
to New York ; add or further, Peter rode to New York ; add James
rode to New York." According to this illustration, and means more,
further, addition. How, then, can it be a con/omzw^ word ? Was aW
a conjunction in character, it would exert as much influence over the
preceding member of the sentence, as it does over the succeeding one.
But Mr. Webster's explanation makes and exert all its influence over
the member of the sentence, which follows and:
"John, and Peter, and James rode to New York:" That is, says
Mr. Webster, John rode to New York; add or further, Peter rode to
New York ; add James rode to New York." The word, and, has
nothing to do with the first member of the paragraph, — ^'John rode to
JSew York." The first and is employed to subjoin, to add, to aflix, the
second member to the first — and " Peter rode to New York."
The second and is used, not to conjoin the second and the third
member of the sentence, but to aflix, subjoin, add the third to the
INTRODUCTION. ^ XIX
second. Andy ihe^^is b. subjoining wox^. — not 2l conjoining one. What!
is the chain which drags a log to a standing tree, a conjunction P To
be a conjoining chain, it must drag the firmly fixed tree as well as the
log, till it brings them together. The first proposition is always fixed
— it cannot be moved by and; as, " John rode to New York"
A second proposition may be dragged to the first by and; as "John
rode to New York; and Peter rode to New York."
Fancy that the Bible is before you. Does the hand which moves
Trego's Geography of Pennsylvania up to this Bible, exert any influ-
ence over the Bible 1 Mr. Webster has well illustrated one trait in
the character of and; but he has not illustrated any part of the char-
acter of a conjoining word ! The main trait in the character of and,
which Mr. Webster, in common with other old school grammarians,
has not attempted to give, is the expression of harmony in character,
with the preceding matter. For instance — " John, and Peter, and James
rode to New York." Here John, Peter, and James ride to the same
place — in this they harmonize, agree — in this they are homogeneous.
John rode; but Peter walked to New Nork.
The ^.gent character of Peter does not harmonize with that of John,
hence and cannot be used before Peter.
John rode to New York ; but Peter rode to Boston.
The character which Boston gives Peter does not accord with that
which New York gives John — hence and can not be used.
« And " signifies harmony in character.
" A certain man planted a vineyard, and set a hedge about it, and
digged a place for the wine-vat, and built a tower, and let it out to
husbandmen, and went into a far country,"
These five acts have the same agent — in this they harmonize —
hence and is properly used before the words, sety digged, built, let, and
went.
In the following and is properly used :
A certain man planted a vineyard ; and his brother set a hedge
about it.
The setting of the hedge is in harmony with the planting of the
vineyard : the setting results naturally enough from the planting.
In the following and can not be used. John built a house; but it
did not stand long.
There is no harmony between the implied intention of the builder,
and the ruin of the house ; it was built, not for destruction, but for
duration.
In the following, and should be used: John makes money and he
keeps it.
The keeping of the money is in harmony with the implied purpose
for which John makes it.
In the following, and cannot be used with any propriety. John
makes money ; but he wastes it.
XX INTRODUCTION.
The wasting of the money is not in harmony with the implied pur-
pose for which it is made.
In the following and should be used :
" Henry has purchased a horse, and John has sold an ox to-day."
As these two acts are business transactions, they are in harmony one
with the other.
In the following and can not be used :
The Alderman heard the witness; hut he had not sworn him.
The not swearing of the witness is so much out of harmony with
the hearing of his statement, that the use of and would be as great a
mockery in grammar, as such a proceeding would be in the adminis-
tration of justice.
The following is good in grammar, as well as in law.
The Alderman swore the witness, and, then, heard his statement.
And signifies that the character of the matter which follows it, is in
harmony with that of the matter which precedes it. The word but,
and several other nepoeclids (conjunctions) signify the reverse.
Why, then, is and used in the following]
" John, and Thomas are honest men."
X. says that and is employed because these two persons are taken
together. But Brown says that and is used because the character of
Thomas is in harmony with that of John.
If and is used because these two persons are taken together, the
following is bad English :
John as well as Thomas is an honest man. Are they not here taken
together ?
As well as, and and, are the same in character, which may be
seen from the following :
Henry is healthy as well as strong.
Henry is healthy and strong.
Let me now ask why must are be used when and occurs 1
« John and Thomas are honest men."
X. says are must be used because the mind takes John and Thomas
together ! But does not the mind take Thomas with John in the fol-
lowing 1 John as well as Thomas is honest !
^hy do we not say, — John as well as Thomas are honest ! ! To
answer this question X. must show that the writer does not intend to
affirm the same thing of Thomas which he affirms of John ! The
doctrine of X. is that wherever the same predicate is ascribed to two
singular subjects, the subjects must be taken together ! He further
teaches that as they are taken together, are must be used instead of
is ! But here are two singular subjects which the mind takes together,
and to which the same predicate is ascribed — yet is, is employed in-
stead of are ! John as well as Thomas is honest ! !
Here is the altar — X. is the victim which must be sacrificed upon it.
: " ■■■ - .^
INTRODUCTION. ^^ XXI
But what has thrown X. upon this burning pile of words? His
" disregard of" the fact that two singular nouns can not make a.plural
one. Book may be repeated a thousand times, — yet each repetition de-
notes a single book — Book, book, book, is not plural. Books is the
plural of fiooA/ The j9/wra/ number is the direct expression of more
than one thing, in the same word ; as man, men.
I hope the readers of the Ledger will fully understand me here.
Mr. Webster says — " Plural, containing more than one, designating
two or more ; as, a. plural word."
«7, and he are." (X.)
Is J a plural word ? Is he a plural word ?
Why then is are used with he ? X. says that "are " is used because
the plural number is found in the nominative. How, pray, is the plu-
ral number made out 1 Why, by taking the person denoted by he,
with him who is expressed by // / Ah ! and does the taking of the
real persons denoted by the words J, and he, infuse the plural number
into the word /, and into the word, he ! 1 This is surely a curious
way of rendering a word plural !
I have always understood that we is the plural of /, and they, of he.
But X. says the plural of the words I, and he, is the taking of the per-
son whom he denotes, with the one whom 1 denotes ! ! !
Mr. Webster says, — " In grammar, the plural number is that which
designates more than one." Mark — it is the plural number of the word
itself, which expresses the plurality of objects ; as, books, we, they. In
what way does X. get a plurality of objects 1 By taking the real
person denoted by he, with the real person denoted by 1/ /
ButMr. Webster says that in grammar, the plurality of objects must
be got by means of the plural number of the word; as, We. They.
«I and he are."
That here are two persons is not denied. Nor can it be denied that
there are two persons in the following : " /, as well as he is !"
X. derives the plurality from the expression of two distinct single
things by means of two distinct pronouns of the singular number !
But in grammar the dominant principle is that the plurality must be
expressed, not by the singular number of two distinct nouns, but by
the plural number of the same noun ! What ! can it be said that the
singular number of a noun, which is the same thing wherever found,
is really the j^/wra/ number because it is found in 1, and he / P As
well may it be said that one drop of water is two drops because it is
found at one time in the tributary stream, and at another in the
mighty ocean ! The same singular number which is found in /, is
found in he. There is but one singular number : The singular num-
ber of I is the capacity of this pronoun to denote but one person.
This same numeral capacity is the singular number of he.
There is but one plural number — the plural number is the capacity
.of the word to express more than one thing; as, we. they.
This same numeral capacity which is in we, is in they.
4*
XXU INTRODUCTION.
" There can be no doubt," says X. " that it is proper to say, four
and one are five. In accordance with our author's theory, we should
say, four and one is five, and by applying his test we should find that
we would say, four is five, and one is five."
1. « Four, and one are five."
2. «• Four is five, and one is five."
The predicate is that which is said of the subject. Here are two
subjects — viz. /our and one. What is the predicate 1 The predicate
in both periods, is Jive.
What is the predicate in the following 1
John, and his brother are sick :
That is, what is said of John, and his brother? It is said of them
that they are Sick.
Sick, then, is the predicate of both. In other words, it is predicated
of John, and his brother, that they are sick.
"Four, and one are five."
Here five is the predicate. But of what is Jive the predicate ? Five
IS the predicate o^four !
Now X., is any thing predicated oifour? O, yes. What is it which is
predicated of four? If any thing is predicated of four, it must he Jive ;
for five is the only predicate in the proposition. It is here said, then,
that /our is Jive I / / But X. says that it is correct to say, '^four and
one zxejivey — ^but incorrect to say, four is five, and one is Jive.
If, however, X. is at all expert in the process of simple reasoning,
he will see with perfect clearness, that his form of expression is liable
to the same objection which he makes to Brown's. *
<« Four, and one are Jive."
Is any thing here affirmed 1 Yes. — What is it ?
It is here affirmed thsit four are Jive ! Is any thing predicated of oric?
Surely. What is the predicate of one? It is Jive J Five is the only
predicate in the sentence — hence, if any thing is predicated of oncy it
must he Jive / What advantage, then, has the form of X. over that
of Brown 1 None at all !
1. « Four, and one are Jive."
2. « Four is five, and one is five."
But is this Brown's construction 1 It is not, — it is the invention of
X. himself! The following is Brown's : Four with one are five.
That is, when you withe, tie, or add one to four, you have five.
Brown's principles, then, not only do not produce absurdity, but they
remove it! But X. could not examine these principles which are
presented in Book I. p. 75. And which are contained in the follow-
ing extract :
[•'The man;] (and the woman bear the conjugal yoke.")
[The man] ; (and the woman bears the conjugal yoke.)
The import of and is that of add. First, it is affirmed in an imple-
nary mono, that the man bears the conjugal yoke — and, secondly, it
INTRODUCTION. XXlll
is affirmed in a plenary mono, that the woman bears it. The true
sense is this: the man bears the conjugal yoke, add that the woman
bears it.
That is, add to the fact that the man bears this yoke, the fact that
the woman also bears it.
["The man ,,,,]; (anc? the woman bears the conjugal
^
INDUOLOGY OF MONOS. 57
" The sun shines"
a plenary unbroken trone, of the exoteric limitory.
That is, the sun which is the great source of heat, and light.
1. "TAe sun shines'' — of the exoteric limitory.
2. " Upon all men " — of the esoteric hmitory.
3. ''Who will receive his rays'' — of the esoteric
hmitory.
{Who is taken with men.)
4. ''Which he sends" — of the esoteric hmitory.
( Which is taken with rays.)
5. "From the heavens " — of the self hmitory.
" From the heavens''* does not seem to be used to limit the rays.
That is, to distinguish these rays from others which the sun may
send from another place. Did this mono suggest the idea that there
are rays which the sun sends from another place, the clad, " who will
receive his rays^'' would be of the diteric limitory. But there is no
appearance that the author of the sentence intends to identify the
rays of which he speaks, by showing whence the sun throws them.
This mono might be omitted without the loss of one idea :
[The sun shines] (upon all men) (who will receive
his rays.)
6. " Which are" — of the esoteric limitory.
(from the heavens) {which are.)
The clad, which are^ is not designed to distinguish the heavens
from which the sun sends his rays, from any other heavens. Hence
this sub can exert no limiting influence upon its super, "from the
heavens.''* Which are seems to be perfectly redundant ; for in this
case there is no propriety in continuing the sentence : there is no call
for any distinction.
7. " Jihove us''^ — of the exoteric limitory.
This mono also is redundant : it cannot be intended to distinguish
the heavens that are above us, from any which are helow us. This
mono is of the exoteric limitory because the beings alluded to by m«,
are ascertained by the word, men^ or by the syllabane, human family.
CHAPTER II.
Induology.
Induology is that part of Syndiecology, which
respects the doctrine of the induements of monos
with special embellishments, brevity, strength &c.
58 INJO^OLOGY OP MONOS.
{Induo, to put something on, and Logos, doctrine.)
Indulogue, the word, or mono, which is indued.
REMARKS.
The word, rhetoric, is made from the Greek, rheo, to speak, and
fccAntcos, technically, hence means to speak technically! That the
application of this word to the doctrines of the induements with
which certain monos are imbued, has produced a vast amount of
embarrassment to the learner of the English Language, is obvious
from the utter inapplicability of the term.
Nor is the use of the word, figure, as applied in Rhetoric, pro-
ductive of any less difficulty to the learner than is the yNovA, rhetoric.
The word, figure, in Greek, is schema ; in Latin, hahitum, vestitum,
and signifies the apparel of the body! But is there any analogy
between a man's apparel, and the following sentences which are
called ^^tt res :
1. " The sword is without/^
2. " T/iei/ have Moses, and the prophets "
In the APPEAL I have attempted to show that those who have
written upon induology, have produced a state in this part of Synti- '
thology, which would be styled anarchy, and misrule, in any political
government that has ever been known to man.
Syndiecology, among other things, respects
1. The limitation which one word, or one mono,
produces by the restrictive influence which it exerts
over another, —
2. The vivacity, dignity, special force, strength
&c. with which some monos are indued, —
3. The want, or destitution, of all these indue-
ments in other monos.
Remarks.
The verbal materials of which, and the particular manner in which,
some monos are constructed, enable them to express their ideas with
a high degree of vivacity, dignity , force, strength, brevity &c. — But
the materials of which, and the manner in which, others are con-
structed, prevent them from expressing their ideas with any of these
graceful induements :
1. [" Can we find out the Lord fully ?'']
2. [" Can we acquire God] (to perfection ?")
These monos are indued with a considerable vivacity, and much
force. But the following which express the same ideas, are without
these graces.
1. [" We cannot find out the Lord fully .^''\
INDUOLOGY OP MONOS. £9
2, [" TVe cannot comprehend God] (to perfection.)
The vividness, forccj strength, dignity, special brevity, and the em-
bellishments which arise from imputing the import of one word to
another, from introducing one thing as a mere index to another, from
taking a part for the whole, or the whole for a part, from inverting
the meaning of words, from extravagant exaggerations, from intro-
ducing a series of things, or circumstances which gradually rise or
fall, in dignity, upon a climactic scale, from contrasting contraries,
from emphatically, and abruptly, introducing something which is not
connected with the main thing, from converting mere things into per-
sons, from adding metaphor to metaphor, from bringing past events
back into pheinic time, from methodical stately arrangements of the
words of a mono, or the monos of apoetroneand from various other
things, may be considered the graces of speech. These induements
are to speech, what turns, trills, and shakes are to music.
Upon the basis of being imbued with these special virtues, these
special graces, and upon the basis of being destitute of these extra
induements, monos are divided into two great classes.
Division of monos upon the basis of their char^
acters as derived from their possession, or from
their want, of the graceful induements of speech :
1. Indutory, and
2. Zerotory, {Zeros, empty, destitute.)
I. INDUTORY.
The indutory is a class, composed of those monos
which are indued with some of the graces of speech •
1. [" Can we find out God] (to perfection?^')
2. [" Can the flag grow] (without water?")
3. [" The kettle boils,'']
11. ZEROtORY.
The zerotory is a class, composed of those monos
which are destitute of all the graceful induements of
speech :
1. [" We cannot find out God] {to perfection'')
2. [" The flag cannot grow] {without water,")
3. p The water boils."]
Subdivision of these classes,
1. The mG?i«/ory is subdivided into
1. Jlntilogue Indutory.
2. Apologue Indutory.
3. Gradulogue Indutory,
60 INDUOLOGY OF MONOS.
4. Cathiselogue Indutory.
5. Optologue Indutory.
6. Hyperlogue Indutory,
7. Ec-pho-ne-logue Indutory.
8. Gno-me-logue Indutory. (No.)
9. An-a-logue Indutory.
10. Jim-il-logue Indutory.
11. Gnom-o-logue Indutory. (nom.)
12. Pan-te-logue Indutory.
13. Me-ro-logue Indutory.
14. Ei-ron-i-logue Indutory.
15. Sy analogue Indutory.
16. Ne-them-e-logue Indutory.
Explanation of the terms.
The main part of each of these technicals, is made
from the word, logos. This word signifies doctrine,
principle, reason, a discourse, a word, or a syllabane,
a mono.
1. The principal part, the basis, of these new
names, is logue.
This part signifies the word, or the mono, which is
indued with some of the graces of speech. As this
part has a fixed meaning, it follows that all the sig-
nification that any technical has, which logue does
not possess, is brought into the word by the prefix
part of it. The parts which are prefixed to logue :
1. ^nti which means, against, contrary to.
2. ^po which means from, a turning from.
3. Gradu which is from gradus, a step.
4. Cathis-e which is from kathisemi, to establish,
confirm.
5. Op'to which is from optomai, to see.
6. Hyper which means above, exaggeration.
7. Ec-pho-ne which is from ecphonesis, an excla-
mation.
8. Gno-me which means a thought, intelligence.
9. Analogue which is from analogia, analogy
among thmgs.
10. Am-il which is from amilla, to emulate, to try
to equal.
INDUOLOGY OP MONOS. gj
11. Gnom-o which is from gnomon, an index,
pointer.
12. Pante which means all, the whole.
1 3. Me-ro which is from meros, a part.
14. Ei-roni which is from eironia, to deride.
15. Sy which is from syn, with, or together,
16. Ne-themi. JVe, not, and themelion, a basis, a
foundation principle.
Illustration,
1. Antilogue indutory : \^He saw life'] {in death,)
2. Apologue indutory: (O,) (ye,) (kings,) [be in-
structed.]
3. Gradulogue indutory: [I think him honest,
moral, pious.']
4. Cathiselogue indutory: [Can the deaf hear?]
5. Optologue indutory: [Yes, he murders his
brother] (for revenge.)
6. Hyperlogue indutory : [Saul was swifter] (than
an eagle.)
7. Ecphonelogue indutory: (O,) (Jerusalem,) (Je-
rusalem.)
8. Gnomelogue indutory : [The ivorm harangued
him thus.]
9. Analogue indutory : [ That man is a fox.]
10. Amillogue indutory: [He stands like] ( , a
tower.)
11. Gnomologue indutory: [He addressed the
chair] (an hour.)
12. Pantelogue indutory: [Jephthah was buried]
(in the cities) (of Gilead.)
13. Merologue indutory: [The ox knoweth his
owner.]
14. Ironilogue indutory: [Nero was a virtuous
prince indeed.]
15. Syanalogue indutory : [Stop the current,]
(young men,) (the meadows have drunk sufficiently.)
16. Ne-them-e-logue indutory : [The water runs.]
6
62 INDUOLOGY OF MONOS.
The new. The old.
1. ANTILOGUE. ANTITHESIS.
2. AP-O-LOGUE. APOSTROPHE.
3. GRAD-U-LOGUE. CLIMAX.
4. CA.THIS.E.LOGUE. EROTESIS.
5. OPTOLOGUE. VISION.
6. HY-PER-LOGUE. HYPERBOLE.
7. EC-PHO-NE-LOGUE. ECPHONESIS.
8. GNO-ME-LOGUE. PROSOPOPOEIA.
9. AN-A-LOGUE. METAPHOR.
10. AM-IL-LOGUE. SIMILE.
11. GNOM-O-LOGUE. METONYMY.
12. PAN-TE-LOGUE. SYNECDOCHE.
13. ME-RO.LOGUE. SYNECDOCHE.
14. I-RON-I-LOGUE. IRONY.
15. SY-AN-A-LOGUE. ALLEGORY.
16. NE-THEM-E.LOGUE.
17. THEM-E-LOGUE.
♦
2. Subdivision of the Zerotory.
The zerotory is divided into two classes :
1. induable, and
2. uninduable.
1. The induahle zerotory is a class, composed of
those monos which can be readily indued with some
of the graces of speech:
1. [" We cannot find out God'] (to perfection.)
2. [" The flag cannot grow] (without water,")
3. [« The water boils,''']
2. uninduable.
The uninduable zerotory is a class, composed of
those monos which cannot be readily indued with
any of the graces of speech :
1. " Can we find out the Lord (to perfection V )
2. "Can the flag grow (without water 7'' )
3. "The kettle boils {from the heat) {of the fire,'')
{to perfection) {without water) {from the heat) {of the fire.)
1. Antilogue indutory.
The antilogue indutory is a class, composed of
those monos which are indued with vivacity, and
force by the introduction of contraries :
INDUOLOGY OF MONOS. 69
1. [" The stork knoweth her appointed time;']
{but my people know not the judgments) (of the
Lord.")
2. [" He saiv life] {in death,) ( , , exaltation) {in
debasement,) { , , glory) {in shame,) { , , a king-
dom) {in bondage,) {and , , light) {in darkness.'^)
3. [" The foxes have holes-,] {but the son {of man)
hath not where to lay his head.^^)
2. Ap'Ologue indutory.
The ap-ologue indutory is a class, composed of
those monos that are indued with that hfe which
springs from a strong desire in the speaker to express
the dislike, or aversion which he feels to what he has
seen in the main subject :
1. (« O,) {Israel,) thou hast destroyed thyself.^'
Hos. 13. 9.
Israel had long displeased the Lord — and he had long expostulated
with them through his prophet, Hosea, for their high provocations
against him. At length, the Lord turns from them as his them, as
his subject, but to them as his audience :
' (" O,) {Israel,) thou hast destroyed thyself," but in
me is thy help." •
Before this, he had spoken of this people, but to Hosea. But a
strong aversion which the Lord felt to their course, caused him to
break off abruptly from speaking of them, and to turn to them to
express the dislike which he felt to it, and the surprise which he felt
at it.
2. [Be wise now, therefore,] ( O,) {ye) {kings,) (be
instructed,) {ye) {judges) (of the earth.") Psalm
ii. 9, 10.
The speech from which David turns to the above instance, is this:
" Thou shalt break them with a rod of iron &c.
David is here speaking to God, but of the kings, and judges of the
earth. David had long denounced the judgments of God against the
rulers of the earth ; but perceiving little, or no reform, he turns from
speaking to God, and addresses the above words of admonition to the
rulers themselves.
" Thou shalt break them with a rod of iron ; thou
ihalt dash them in pieces like a potter's vessel."
64 INDUOLOGT OP MONOS.
"Be wise now, therefore, O, ye kings; and be in-
structed, ye, judges of the earth !"
3. ["Hear,] (O, {heavens,) (and give ear) (O,)
eai'th ;) (for the Lord hath spoken,) (I have nour-
ished,) (and brought up children ;) (and they have re-
belled) (against me.") Isaiah 1. 2.
Isaiah had long complained of Judah for her rebellion. He had
long exhorted her to repentance, first with promises, then with
threatenings. And, under the excitement of sore disappointment,
and dislike, he turns abruptly /rom them, and addresses the heavens^
And the earth.
4. [Death is swallowed up] (in victory.) (O,)
(Death!) [where is thy sting?] (O,) (Grave,)
[where is thy victory ?]
Paul here abruptly breaks off from speaking of death, and turns to
death, and the grave which he addresses in terms of taunt, and
reproach:
" 0, Death, where is thy sting 7 0, Grave^ where
is thy vixitory ?
In other phrase — Death, thou shalt be put to deep shame when the
saying shall have been brought to pass, " Death shall he swallowed up
in victory" O, death, it will then be demonstrated that thy boasted
sting which is sin, hath been extracted from thee by the atonement
of Christ. And O, grave, it shall then appear that thy vaunted
powers to hold, in eternal dominion, the redeemed of the Lord, are
the subject of a vain boast.
3. Gradulogue indutory.
The gradulogue indutory is a class, composed of
those monos that are indued with that exornation
which springs from gradually ascending from the least
to the greatest, or from gradually descending from the
greatest to the least :
1. \^''Jidd (to your faith) virtue f^^ (to your virtue)
( , , knowledge,) (to your knowledge) ( , , tem-
perance,) {and (to your temperance) , , patience,)
{and (to patience) , , godliness,) {and (to godliness)
, , brotherly kindness,) {a7id (to brotherly kindness)
, 5 charity J)
2. [« The head (of every man) is Christ ;] {and
INDUOLOGY OF MONOS. gg
the head (of the woman) is the man ;) [and the head
(of Christ) is God:')
3. [^' His arm gave blows ,'1 {his blows gave
wounds;) [and his wounds gave death.)
4. (In the beginning) [was the word;] (and the
word was) (with God;) (and the word was God.'^)
5. [" Hope Cometh] from experience ;) (experience
, ) (from patience ;) (and patience , ) (from tri-
bulation:*)
6. [" Tribulation worketh patience ;'\ (and patience
, experience ;) (and experience , hope^')
4. Cathiselogue indutory.
The cathiselogue indutory is a class, composed of
those monos that are indued with power to estabUsh,
or confirm, the idea by a construction which seems to
imply that the thing stated, is an axiom :
1. ["t/fre not Jive sparrows sold] (for two far-
things ?'*)
2. [« Can the blind see .?"]
3. [" Have I not seen Jesus Christ] ( , , our
Lord?")
4. I" Doth God pervert judgment ?*'"}
5. Opiologue indutory.
The optologue indutory is a class, composed of
those monos that are indued with vivacity, and force
from the bringing past events back into phemic time :
1. [".^?ic? immediately the spirit driveth him]
(into the wilderness.")
2. [Yes^ (Gentlemen) (of the jury,) the monster
(at the Bar) plunges this dagger] (into the heart) (of
his own brother) (for no better reason) (than that) (of
revenge.")
Where a speaker wishes to make a deep impression, he often em
ploys a inono of the epanaleptic class. By the use of the phemic
chronodex, he brings back the whole scene, into the time of speaking
By this means those whom he addresses, are made to see, the deed to
which he is directing their attention.
6*
66 INDUOLOGY OP MONOS.
6. Hyperlogue indutory.
The hyperlogue indutory is a class, composed of
those monos that are indued, from the use of par-
ticular words, with powers greatly to exaggerate^ or
diminish the degree to which the objects spoken of,
have the qualities, ascribed to them :
The object of this Indulogue is to give the reader a just idea of
the remarkable degree to which the objects possess the attributes,
imputed to them.
1. [" The flowers (in yonder meadow) are stars J^~\
2. [« He is Lucifer."]
3. [" She is an angelJ'']
4. ["He owned a piece] (of ground) {which was
not larger) [than a Lacedemonian letter.''^)
5. [" He was so gaunt] ( , , , that) {the case of a
flagelet) was a inansion) (for him.")
6. [" Man is a mere ivorm.*']
[f' Saul was swifter] {than an eagle;) {and, ,
stronger) {than a Hon.")
7. Ecphonelogue indutory.
The ecphonelogue indutory is a class, composed of
those monos which are indued with the vehement
emotions, the exclamatory emotions, of the speaker :
1. (" O,) {Lord,) [how excellent is thy name?"]
2. (" O,) {wretched man) (that I am) [who shall
deliver me] (from the body) (of this death !")
3. (" O) {Jerusalem.,) {Jerusalem,) (which killeth
the prophets.")
4. [^- How is the golden city spoiled f^^]
5. ("' O,) tyrant heaven,) (and {traitor earth,) how
is this done ? how is this suffered ? Hath this world a
government ?
On seeing the innocent Philoclea beheaded, Pyrocles burst forth
into these exclamations.
Monoized :
(" 0,) tyrant heaven,) [how is this done] {and how-
ls this suffered ?) {and (how is this done,) {and how is
INDUOLOGY OF MONOS. 67
this suflfered,) (tyrant earth?) [Has this world a
government ?"]
8. Gnomelogue indutory.
The gnomelogue indutory is a class, composed of
those monos which are indued with special impress-
iveness, and animation, by imputing intelligence to
subjects which are without mind :
1. ["Behold] {this stone shall be a witness) (unto
us ;) (for it hath heard all the words) (of the Lord)
(which he hath spoken) (unto us.")
The intelligence which is ascribed to the stone, is implied in
V3itne88 and heard.
2. [" Let the floods clap their hands ;] Clet the
hills rejoice together." J
The indulogue words are hands^ clap^ and rejoice.
3. [" Wisdom crieth] (at the gates.'*) " crieth."
4. ["And he cried] {against the altar) (in the
words) (of the Lord,) (and , said, (0,) (Altar,)
(*dltar,) (thus saith the Lord.")
(against Altar^ Altar.)
' 9. Analogue indutory.
The analogue indutory is a class, composed of
those monos which are indued with special dignity,
perspicuity, and brevity, by illustrating the qualities
of their subjects in one word, by a substitution of
analagoUs attributes :
1. [" Washington was the pillar^ (of our country:)
The attributes which Washington exhibited in relation to our
country, are illustrated in the one word, pillar. The qualities of a
pillar are substituted for those which Washington manifested in
reference to our country in the revolutionary struggle. But instead
of expressing these qualities in language unindued with any of the
graces of speech, the writer indues his mono with special vividness^
and strength.
Unindued : Washington sustained our country.
The unindued language enables us to understand — but the indued
makes us see our country placed upon Washington to be preserved in
the whirlwind of faction, and tempest of war.
68 INDTTOLOGY OP MONOS.
^. [" The Queen (of Sheba) saw the wisdom] (of
Solomon.)
The attribute of seeing is here put for the quality of proving, and
understanding.
3. [" The neighing (of horses) is heard] (from
Dan.")
The quality of Aeartn^ is substituted for the attribute of foreseeing
The neighing of horses, is foreseen by the prophet.
4. [" That man is ajbx.'*'}
The craftiness of that man is illustrated by the cunning of the foz
The stratagem of the fox is substituted for the craftiness of that
particular man.
5. [" These soldiers were lions] (in combart.")
6. \^' A prudent man bridles his anger. ^^'l
The quality of controlling the horse with the bridle, is substituted
for the attribute of restraining the anger of the man.
{Every action is a quality.)
6. [Opposition Jires courage] (in all.)
. What^re is to matter, opposition is to courage.
10. Amillogue indutory.
The amillogue indutory is a class, composed of
those monos which are indued with that impressive
ness, and perspicuity, that spring from representing
the qualities of their subjects as emulating the
qualities of other things which are known to possess
the same attributes in a remarkable degree ;
(ilmt7Za, to try to equal.)
1. [" He Stands like] ( , a tower.")
2. [« Faith (in affliction) is like] ( , light) (in
darkness.)
3. ["As the door turneth] (upon its hinges,) {so
doth the slothful) (upon his bed.")
This indulogue is called by the old school grammarians, a simile.
But so laxly have writers, in general, treated this subject that it is
hardly possible to decide whether the whole sentence is denominated
a simile, or whether a mere part of it falls under this denomination
In a work, compiled by Goold Brown, however, I find a precision of
wluch others are destitute. He says.
INDUOLOGY OF MONOS. 69
'•A simile is a simple and express comparison; and is generally
introduced by like, as, or so : as,
" At first, like thunder^s distant tone^
The rattling din came rolling on."
" Like thunder^s distant tone,''^ is marked as the simile portion of
the sentence. But, as a simile is a comparison are not all the things
which are compared simile things ? If there is any comparison in
this example it is instituted between the *^ thunder's tone," and the
rattling din. Why, then, is not the rattling din as much a simile
portion of the sentence as the thunder^ s tonef When John and
Joseph are compared one with the other does not the simile character
of the sentence which makes the comparison, infuse itself into both!?
^'John is as old as Joseph"
Is not this a simple, and an express, comparison ? If so this is a
simile ! ! Which part of the comparison is a simile ! ? •' Dentihia
aVba,^'* is as much a simile as is '* like thunder"*^ distant tone .'"
11. Gnomologue indutory.
The gnomologue indutory is a class, composed of
those monos that are indued with that grace which
springs from using one thing as a mere index to
another :
1. [« Mr. Adams addressed the chair] (an hour.")
2. [" The kettle boils.'']
3. [" They have Moses ;] {and , , the prophets.")
- 4. [" The house is building.^']
5. [" The Lord loveth righteousness.'']
1. The chair is mentioned as a mere index to him who occupied it
And much brevity is derived from the use of the chair as a gnomon,
an index, with which to point out the president of the meeting.
1. He addressed the chair.
2. He addressed the president of the meeting.
2. The kettle bears an index relation to the liquid which it contains.
Hence the kettle is mentioned as an index to the water which boils
in it.
3. Moses, and the prophets bear an index relation to their works.
Hence, he and they are introduced as gnomons to these works.
4. " The house is building."
They who reject this expression upon the ground that the house
itself does not build, must also reject the following, ,, .
'< The kettle boils," « He addressed the chair an
hour," " We have Moses, and the prophets."
70 INDUOLOGY OP MONOS.
Does the kettle itself boil ? No, Have we Moses himself? No.
Have we the prophets themselves ? No, verily.
The house advances under the act of building. This act however,
is not done by the house^ but by the builder. But, as the house
advances toward a finish, so to speak, under the influence of this act,
this act bears an index relation to this advancement — hence, in
speaking of the advancement of tlie house, this act is mentioned as a
mere gnomon, a mere index, to this advancement. He that can wrest
this, and its kindred expressions, fi-om our language, may deride the
cathiselogue, " Canst thou draw out Leviathan with a hook ?"
5. " The Lord loveth righteousness.' '
Righteousness bears an index relation to good men — Whence right'
eousness is used as the means of referring to righteous men.
12. Pantelogue indutory.
The pantelogue indutory is a class, composed of
those monos which are indued with that brevity, ease,
and embellishment which spring from taking the
whole for a part :
1. [" Whereby the world (that then was) ( , being
overflowed) (with water,) , perished."] 2 Peter 6.
The « worW is the pantelogue^ the whole world, taken for the earth,
a mere part of the world.
2. [" Till thou return"] (to the ground.'^)
« T^iott" includes the whole man, soul, and hody. And, as the body
only, is to return to the ground, ^'^tkoiC'* is a pantelogue — a word
which takes the whole for a part.
3. [" These are the sons] (of Jacob) {which were
born) (to him) (in Padanaram.") Gen. xxxv. 2Q.
In verses 22, 23, 24, 25, there is an enumeration of the twelve sons
of Jacob. Verse 26, declares that all of them were born in Padan~
aram. Yet Benjamin was born on the way near Ephratk, which is
declared in verse 16.
4. [" These all died] (in faith.")
These— that is, all whom the apostle had enumerated, died in &ith.
A.mong them, however, was Enoch who, as is declared m verse 5, did
not die at all !
**By faith Enoch was translated that he should not see death.''*
Verse 5.
** All these died,* the whole mono is the pantologue. If there is
any one word in it, which can be considered the pantelogue, it is all.
5' ["And Jephthah was buried] {in the cities) (of
Gilead.")
INDUOLOGY OF MONOS. 71
6. [" The thieves also (which were cracifit d) (with
him,) upbraided him.^^'\
Both are mentioned for the one who actually did upbraid him.
7. [" We deceived the people,'] {and , seemed
or at or s.^^)
Cicero here speaks of himself
When an editor says we for himself only, he employs a. pantelogue.
13. Merologue indutory.
The merologue indutory is a class, composed of
those monos which are indued with that brevity, ease,
and embellishment, which spring from taking a part
for the ivhole :
1. [" The horse is a noble animaU''\
2. [" Therefore we conclude that] {man is justified
by faith.")
One man is here taken for many, for all men.
3. [« Then Abraham took Sarah] ( , , his wife,)
{and , , the souls.") (&c.)
SouU — a mere part. The whole— -mc??, and women.
4. [" The Roman was victor'] (in battle.'^)
5. ["I am not worthy] ( , that) (thou shouldst
come) {under my roof?^)
The roof which is a mere part, is here taken for the whole house.
Thou shouldst come into my house.
6. ["And it was told] (the house) (of David)
(Saying,) (Syria is confederate) {with Ephraim.^')
Isaiah vii. 2.
Ephraim is put for the ten tribes of Israel.
7. ["Because Syria, {Ephraim , , , , ) (and the
son , , , , ) (of Remalia) have taken evil counsel)
(against thee.") Isaiah vii. 5.
Ephraim is put for the ten tribes of Israel.
8. [" But blessings shall be] {upon the head) (of
him) (that selleth it.")
9. [".^ man shall eat good] (by the fruit) (of his
mouth.")
One man is put for all
72 INDUOLOGY OP MONOS.
14. Ironilogue indutory.
The ironilogue indutory is a class, composed of
those monos which are indued with that derision,
taunt, and contrariety, which are derived from using
words in direct opposition to their true import :
1. [" Cry aloud ;] {for he is a god.)
2. [" Nero was a virtuous prince indeed."]
3. [" Pope Hiidebrand was remarkable] {for his
meekness.'^)
That is, he was remarkable for his want of this Christian grace.
15. Sy analogue indutory.
A syanalogue is a sentence embellished with a
series^ of analogues upon the same subject:
1. [^« Stop the current^ (young men,) {the meadows
have drunk sufficiently.")
The two monos, ["Stop the current;] (the meadows have druuk
sufficiently^^) are a synalogue. These two monos are analogues.
They come together — they are within the same poetene — hence they
are a syanalogue. {Sy from «yn, together.)
These two analogues are the component parts of the syanalogue.
These monos, then, may be referred to an indutory upon the basis of
that syanalogue character which they derive from constituting a
syanalogue.
The syanalogue indutory is a class, composed of
those analogues which aid in the formation of a
syanalogue :
1. l'^ Bub not the scar.'\ {lest you open again the
tvound) {that is"" healed,) {and cause it to bleed
afresh.' ')
These four analogues form one syanalogue.
16. Ne-theni-e-logue indutory.
Greek. iVe, not, themelioUy foundation, basis, principle. — Not
having a foundation, not having a basis principle.
Indulogues may be divided into themelogues^ and Ne-them-e-logues.
When the induement has a sound basis in the property of the thing
whicii is mentioned in the syllabane, the mono is a themelogue ; as, I
have read Blackstone.
* The word, series^ signifies, a succession of things. A series of
analogues, then, is two, or more that come together which is the
import of the prefix, sy.
INDUOLOGY OP MONOS. 73
When the induement has not a sound basis in the property of the
thing which is mentioned in the syllabane, the mono is a Ne-tkem e-
logne ; as, " The water runs.''*
The nethemelogue indutory is a class, composed
of those monos which pass as English, though their
induement has not a foundation in the properties of
the things which the monos denote :
1. [" The water r«/w."] •
That which has no feet cannot, with strict propriety, be said to rniu
2. [" Let my right hand forget her cunning."
It can hardly be said of that which has no mind^ that it forgets.
3. [" The sword shall devour, , ] (and ,
shall be satiate,) (and , , be made drunk)
(with their blood.^^) Jeremiah xlvi. 10,
1. As a sword is not a living creature, and as it has no teeth^ bow
can it devonr ?
2. As a sword has nothing answering to a stomachy it is far-fetched
indeed to speak of this weapon as being filled to satiety.
3. He that is drunk, is stupefied by the action of spirits on the
stomachy and bruin. A sword has nothing analagous to these organs —
hence the induement of the third mono, is too far-fetched to be
sanctioned by the laws of induology. It is a nethemelogue.
4. Had blood any thing analagous to the stupefying power of spirits,
the induement of the foiurth mono, might be sanctioned by induology.
But, as blood has no such powers, the fourth mono also is a netheme-
logue.
4. ["Enoch was translated] ( , that) (he
should not see death.") Heb. xi. 5.
" He should not see death," is a nethemelogue.
The phrase, " see death,''* is used for die :
Enoch Was translated that he should not die.
In the above nethemelogue^ it is intimated that a dead body can see.
But as a corpse has no power to enable it to see, Enoch would never
have seen death, even had he remained on the earth till he had died
like other men.
5. [" This man has a beautiful voice."]
As a voice has nothing which comes to the mind through the me-
dium of the eye, it cannot be denominated beautiful.
6. [" They build a horse] by Pallas art divine."
Mechanics do not build horses — farmers raise them. The analogy
between the raising of a horse, and the construction of a house, is loo
alight to justify the application of the v/ord, build, even to the act of
forming the famous Trojan horse.
7
74 INDUOLOGY OF MONOS.
7. [" The elbow (of his nose) is disproportionable,**'\
The crook in some noses, is not enough like the elbow of the arm,
to justify this iuduement.
8. [" And I will cut down your images] (and ,
, cast your carcasses) {upon the carcasses)
(of your idols.") Levit. xxvi. 30
The induement which is given to the italic mono, is not justified by
induology. The carcasses, mentioned in this nethemelogue, are mere
pieces of images.
9. [" For the Lord hath heard the voice"] (of my
weeping.")
As nothing which has not the organs of articulation, can have a
cotcc, it is difficult to see upon what principle in induology, the in-
duement of this mono can be sustained.
" The Lord hath heard my weeping^'' interdicts this induement, and
improves the language: it is better to use language un indued with
any of the graces of speech than to employ that which is improperly
indued.
Specimen.
1. [" The murmuring (of the water) is music."]
1. " The murmuring is music^^
A plenary broken trone of the esoteric limitory, analogue
indutory.
2. '^ of the water /'
A plenary unbroken clad of the exoteric limitory^ uninduable
zerotory.
This clad is of the exoteric limitory : all water does not murmur—-
hence the idea is that the murmuring of the water which does murmur
at all, is music.
2. [" He learned his arguments] (from Aristotle,)
(and , , his eloquence) (from Tully.")
1. " He learned his argu?nents,"
A plenary unbroken trone of the exoteric limitory, induabl^
zerotory.
2. '''from Aristotle^^
A plenary unbroken clad, exoteric limitory, gnomologue indutory.
This clad is of the exoteric limitory because the word, Aristotle,
must be associated with the syllabane, Aristotle's works. Indeed the
word, Aristotle, is used for this syllabane. But even was this clad
not thrown into the exoteric class of monos upon this principle, it
would still be of this limitory. For the question which would
naturally arise respecting the identity of the Aristotle to whom
INDUOLOGY OP MONOS. 75
allusion is here made, must be answered by something which i3 out
of the poetrone. From what Aristotle did he learn his arguments 1
He learned them from Aristotle who was an ancient Greek philosopher,
3. and , , his eloquence"
An implenary unbroken clad, of the esoteric limitory, uninduablc
zerotory.
4. of Tulii/y"
A plenary unbroken clad, of the exoteric limitory, gnomologue
indutory.
3. [" It is not my sword] (that can help me.'*)
1. " // is not my sword^^
A i^enary unbroken trone of the esoteric limitory, merologue
indutory.
The sword is a mere part of the weapons of defence in war — and
this part is here put for aU.
2. " that can help me"
A plenary unbroken clad of the diteric limitory, induable zerotory.
This mono is limited, in part, by sword^ in the cormotene.
3. [" Canst thou draw out Leviathan"] (with gi
hookP^O
1. " Canst thou draw out Leviathan,"
A plenary unbroken trone of the exoteric limitory, cathiselogue
indutory.
2, ^^with a hook^^
A plenary unbroken clad of the esoteric limitory, unindwMt
zerotory.
5. [<)( > 5 J > 5 ? )( J
shame , ) (to the proud , ,) (and ,
, , , , )( , good laws , )
(to the wicked , .")
1. " What , is more odious,"
An implenary unbroken trone of the self limitory, antilogus
indutory.
2. " than labor , )
An implenary unbroken clad of the self limitory, antilogue indutory
76 INDUOLOOY OF MONOS.
3. " to the idle" j )>
An imfrfenary unbroken elad of the self limitory, uninduM^
zcrotory. •(
^* ( > J > > ? ^ )
A plenary unbroken clad of the self limitory, antilogue indutory,
5. ( , fasting , ),
All implenary unbroken clad of the »«!/ limitory, a»fifog7#« indutory.
Learner,
Give the Syndiecology of the following rnonoi
according to the preceding specimen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
TVhat , is more odiousj
than labor , ),
to the idle , ),
>
, fasting
to the glutton,)
> } 9 9
, want , ),
to the covetous , ),
y y } y > > /
, shame , )»
to the proud , ),
and , 9 , y ,.. ,, \
to the wicked , ),
, good laws , .)
REMARKS.
Before referring the pupil to Exercises in other
books, I deem it a duty to say that nothing but a
thorough drilling in syndiecology, can give that
knowledge of the English Language, which is abso^
lutely necessary to enable one to use it with ease, and
propriety.
Exercises in Syndi cology. *''"' ^' * •^•
1. Take the various Exercises in book i.
2. Take the following portions of the scriptures ;
1. Kings xvii. 1. 1. Samuel xvii. 6, 7. Gen. vii.
* The noetons are, and what thing h more odiou*.
INDUOLOGT OF MONOS. 77
7. Isa. iv. 1. Matt. x. 30, 24, 20. Acts xxiv. 26.
Matt. xxvi. 15. 1. Kings xii. 10. Isa. ii. 9. Luke
vii. 44. Matt. xxi. 3. John xi. 3, 12, 28. Matt. viii.
20. and ix. 6. Gen. xlviii. 16 Exodus iii. 2. Isa.
Ixiii. 9. Gen. xxxi. 2. Dan. xi. 22. Gen. iii. 15.
Hebrews xxii. 24. I Kings x. 4. Hagg. i. 9. Jer.
viii. 15. Ecclesiastes i. 8. Hab. ii. 11. Lam i. 4.
Matt. iii. 11. Ps. Ixxx. 8.
7*
.j^ CONMCTION.
CHAPTER III.
COKDIGTIOIf.
Condiction is that part of Syndicology, which respects
the injport of monos. (Con, together^ and Dictio, speech.)
Diction is the expression of thoughts.
There is a difference between the diction of words, a»d the sig-
nificaiion of words. Signification respects the mere pouter of a
word to raise an idea in the mind; but diction respects the «rer-
Hon of that power in the act of raising an idea in the mind. For
instance, a certain word has the significant power to raise a par-
ticular idea in the mindy but, then, this power is not exerted, in the
raising of this idea, till the certain word which has this power, is
written, or spoken. Let this be illustrated in the expression of
some word which you have not in your mind at the this moment:
for instance, ear.
This word had the power of raising in your mind, the idea of
the organ of hearing, before you saw the word — but it did mil exert
this power till you saw the word. The poxver itself is significa-
tion : but the eaeertion of the power is denominated diction.
Diction is the expression of thoughts. Or,
Diction is the expression of separate thoughts, and eon-
fleeted thoughts, and finally of information, intelligence.
There are three kinds of diction ; namely,
1. .^^diction ; 2. Condiction ; and, 3. Cardietion.*
1. w^6diction is that act of words, which presents thoughts
as separate^ as, pen, moon, ice, new, reads, walks, in, at, to,
2. Candiction is that act of words, which presents
thoughts as connected^ as, new pen, in ice, moon light
night, at church.
3. Cordietioa is the information, the inteUigenee, which
the mono gives ; a?,
1. [John went] [to Boston.)
2. [Go thou} (to Boston,) (John.)
3. (Gentlemen,) [will John go] (to Boston ?)
4. [John will see his friends,] (if he goes) (fe> Boston^)
5. [Forgive thou our sins.]
* A cordiction differs from a poefene .* a cordiction embraces the
poetene, and the information given by means of the poetene. But
a poetene embraces the mere abstract affirmation, the abstract in-
ierrogation, the abstract command^ the abstract petition, or the a^
struct subfirmation^
'^ICONDICTION OF NBPOECLADS. 79
1. [John went] (to Boston.)
Cordiction is the information which the mono gives.
The cordictioii of this sentence, then, is confined to the
trone. The trone not only informs the reader that John
wenfj but it informs him that he went to Boston, From a
slight glance at this subject, however, it may seem to some
that the nepoeclad gives information, and that, therefore,
the diction of this mono also is cordiction, information dic-
tion. But what information does this nepoeclad impart? It
does not, as from a first view it seems to do, inform the
reader where John went. The word, Boston, raises in the
mind of the reader, the idea of a place, a town, a city ; but
it does not inform the reader that any person ever went to
this place, this town ! This may be seen from the omis-
sion of the trone :
[ ] (to Boston.)
The philosophy of the thing seems to be this : the word,
Boston, denotes a place ; and the trone, " John went,^ in-
forms the reader that John went to this certain place. The
word, Boston, is employed to hold up this certain town
before the mind; and the words, ^^John went,^^ are con-
nected, and employed, to inform the reader of the fact that
John visited this particular place.
2. [Go thou] (to Boston,) (John.)
The information which is communicated in this sentence,
is communicated to John. This information is the cordic-
tion of the sentence, and is given in the trone, " Go thou.^*
This mono informs John that he must go to Boston. The
trone, then, is the only mono which contains a cordiction.
That the two nepoeclads express thought3, and connected
thoughts, is obvious. These connected thoughts, however,
amount to nothing more than mere condiction which can
never give information, intelligence. These two monos
do not rise to cordiction, because they do not give informor
tion which is the heart, the life, the sole object of speech.
•** To Boston,^^ gives no information ; nor does the word,
John, impart any intelligence. But the mono, " Go thou,^^
does give information : it informs John that he must not
only go, but that he must go to Boston :
[Go thou] (to Boston,) (John.)
3. (Gentlemen,) [will John go] (to Boston?)
et) OONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
The trone informs the gentlemen addressed, that
the speaker desires them to inform him whether John will,
or will not go to Boston. If the word, gentlemen^ should
be omitted, all who read the sentence would be informed by
the trone of the fact that the speaker desires to know
whether John will, or whether he will not go, to Boston :
ITVill John go] (to Boston ?)
Here, whoever reads is informed that the speaker desires
to know whether the act which now stands connected with
Jahn and Boston^ in idea only, will have a future reality.
The speaker may inform the readers of his desire in the
following form :
Reader, I desire to know of you whether John will go to
Bjston.
ITfill John go] (to Boston ?)
There is another point which deserves particular atten-
tion : and this point is the fact that the information, the in-
telligence, given in the whole sentence, is imparted by the
joint action of the two words, will and John. The word,
go J gives no information : *' TVill John " raises the ques-
tion which informs the reader of the fact that the speaker
desires to know whether John will go to Boston. The in-
formation which is communicated to the reader, is the fact
that the speaker has this special desire. This fact is com'
municated by the simple question which is raised by the
two words, " Will John.^^
. " Go" is the sign of an action — and it is here used, not
to inform the reader that the speaker has a desire of any
kind, but simply to connect an action in idea, with John, and
Boston. Yes, the condiction presents an action in idea,
which extends from John to Boston — and the cordiction
informs the reader that the speaker has a desire to ascertain
whether this condiction of mere ideas will ever have a
reality.
The cordiction is not only confined to two words in the
interrogative form of giving information, but in the affirma-
tive form also :
1. [Will John go] (to Boston?)
2. [John will go] (to Boston,)
In the first, information is given that the speaker desires
to ascertain whether John will visit Boston.
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS, 81
In the second, information is given that John will go to
Boston. And both items of information are given by willf
and John. The reader is informed respecting the speaker's
desire by placing will before John, {Will John). And the
speaker is informed respecting the fact which he desires to
know, by placing ^^wilV^ after '■'• John.''^
4. " [John will see his friends] (if he goes) (to
Boston.")
In the trone the speaker informs the reader that
John will see his friends. John will.
In the poeclad, " if he goes" the speaker informs the
reader that, the condition upon which John will see his
friends, is that he must go to Boston.
5. *' Forgive thou our sins.'*
Here the being addressed is informed that we desire him
to forgive our sins. This information is imparted by the
two words, *' Forgive thou.'^ And as the cordiction is the
information which the mono g^ives, the cordiction of this
mono lies in the two words, " Forgive thou." But it may
be said that '* our sins" are necessary to the giving of this
information. This fact is admitted. But it does not follow
that because these two words are necessary to the giving of
this particular information, that these words give this infor-
mation ; nor does it thence follow that they give any part of
this information. A head is necessary to an eye — but it
does not thence follow that a head sees, or that the head has the
power of vision. Breath is necessary to life — yet it does
not follow that breath is life. A pen is necessary
to write — yet it does not follow that the pen itself actually
writes. It may be well to repeat the sentence :
*' Forgive thou our sins."
What is the information imparted by this mono ?. The
information communicated in this mono, is that we have a
desire to have the being addressed, to forgive our sins. Upon
a cursory glance at ihis sentence every thing appears so
clear that no particular attention is necessary to a full appre
hension of its entire philosophy. The sentence, however,
is not so simple in its philosophy as it seems to be from
such a glance. It becomes important, then, to give minute
attention to it. In giving this attention, it may be well to
consider words in the first place both in their general, and
82 CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
in their special^ or restrained application. For instance:
The word, John, has its unrestricted, and its restricted
application. Under its unrestricted application, the word,
John, means every John in the universe ; as, John.
But the word, John, under its restricted application, does
not mean every John ; as, that John, my John, John
Bacon.
Where there is no word restrained in its application,
speech is not even begun j as, hook, pen, kite, virtue, vice,
red, black, in, my, forgive.
This is mere addiction : a presentation of separate, un
connected, thoughts.
But where a word can be found which is in any degree
restrained in its application, speech is begun : as, this hook,
my pen, his kite, virtue of plants, vice of men, red ink,
black ink, in water, my hat, io forgive Joseph.
This is condiction. Speech has its commencement in
condiction, but its perfection in cordiction, in — informa-
tion; as. Forgive thou our sins.
The word, forgive, as here used, is restricted : it means
here a particular act. In the first place it is restrained to
the forgiving act of the Supreme Being : the word as here
used does not apply to the forgiving act of m,en — since
men cannot forgive sins. The word, forgive, is farther re-
strained in its application by the word, sins. The for giving
act to which the word,forgive, is here applied, is confined
to sins: the act is removed from debts, and from every other
thing which can be forgiven. And this forgiving act is
farther restrained by the word, our : this act of forgiving is
removed from all sins except those which have been com-
mitted by the very persons who make this petition :
*' Forgive Thou our sins."
Now, then, this very act — the act which is restricted to
the Supreme Being as its agent, and to our sins as its sub-
ject, is the act which we desire to have performed. And
what is it which informs him who is addressed, of the fact
that there is any desire in existence to have this special, this
identical, act performed ? Is this information given by the
condiction, *' our sins .^" " Our sins " aids in restricting
the act — '* oursins,^^ however, does not give any intimation
that there exists a desire to have this z.ct performed.
rovUTCTION OF NEPOECLADS. 83
The information which this mono gives is the intelhgence
of the fact of the existence of this desire. This intelligence
is the cordiction, and is given by the joint action of the
words, " Forgive Thou."
6. ''John is dead.''
1. ** John '* denotes a human being — but this word gives
no information.
2. ''Dead'' denotes a state — but this word gives no in-
formation. But,
'* John is dead " informs the reader that this state of dsat*,
belongs to John. This information is the cordiction.
1. Condiction is found in every mono.
2. Cordiction is found in the trone, and poe-
clad only. The nepoeclad can give no information :
it consists of condiction only. Information, as the word
cordiction indicates, {cor, the heart,) is the life, the heart of
speech.
From information.
All speech emanates ;
In information.
All speech terminates.
Condiction, without this,
Could not to speech pretend ;
Condiction, but for this.
Is diction to no end.
Body, without the heart,
Could not to life aspire ;
So words without this part
Gould give no mind's desire,
1 . To dbdict is to express thoughts in an unconnected
state ; as, hook, hand, in.
2. To condict is to express thoughts in a connected state ;
as, my 600A:, in hand.
3. To cordict is to express information, the only thing
which moves the mind to speak ; as, my hooik fell.
All words have the addictive, and the condictive power
But all have not the cordictive.
f^.^M ' ■ "^^
84 CONDIOTION OP NEPOECLADS.
I. Division of the Cordiction.
1. Affirniative "^
2. Subfirmative
3. Interrogative
4. Imperative
5. Petitionative^
>C0RDICTI0N.
A DiCATORY.
A dicatory, as has been said already, is a class to which
monos are referred upon the basis of their diction. There
are two general Dicatories, viz. Cordicatory, and Con-
DICATORY.
1. A cordicatory is a class to which monos are referred
upon the basis of their cordiction.
2. A condicatory is a class to which monos are referred
upon the basis of their condiction.
I. Subdivision of the Cordicatory.
There are five kinds of cordicatorieSf namely, Affirma-
tivCt Subfirmative, Interrogative, Imperative, Petitiona-
tive.
1. The affirmative Cordicatory is that class which is com
posed of monos that contain affirmative cordictions.
2. The subfirmative Cordicatory is that class which is
composed of those monos that contain subfirmative cordic-
tions.
3. The interrogative Cordicatory is a class which is
composed of those monos that contain interrogative coxd^ic-
tions.
4. The imperative Cordicatory is a class which is com-
posed of those monos that contain imperative cordictions.
5. The petitionative Cordicatory is a class which is com-
posed of those monos that contain petitionative cordictions.
Division of Condiction.
Condiction is divided into,
1. Rudiction.
2. E-diction.
3. Ex-e-diction.
1. Rudiction is that part of Condiction, which is
the rudimental, the radical, idea, from which another
thought springs, or upon which another thought de-
pends. (Latin. Rudimentum, original, primary, root,
first principle.)
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS. 85
2. E-diction,
E-diction is that part of Condiction, which, in some
sense or other, springs from, or goes beyond Rudiction,
(E, springing out of, or going beyond.)
3. Ea:-e-dictio7i,
Ex-e-diciion is that part of Condiction, which, in
some sense, or other, springs from, or goes beyond
c-diction. [Ex, springing out of, or going beyond.)
Illustration,
1. "He was troubled [at this report.^^)
2, "Henry is now (at the law")
1. The rudimental idea in the condiction of both nepoeclads, is that
of place. He is at the door.
This local idea is the Rudiction.
2. The idea of presence which is obviously a part of the condiction
of both nepoeclads, not only springs from the rudiction^ but actually
goes beyond it. The idea of presence is not necessarily connected
with that o? place; as, "John is beyond the mark." (Here John is
not in the presence of the mark.)
John was {present) (at church.)
"He was troubled {at this report.")
That is, when this report came into his presence^ he was troubled.
Or — while he was in the presence of this report, he was troubled.
3. The trouble which he had, sprang out of the presence of " this
report." The presence of the report, was a cause : the presence pro-
duced the trouble. The report would not have given him trouble, had
it not come into his presence. This causative idea, then, is not only
derived from the e-diction, the presence, but actually goes a step be-
yond it. Hence this idea of cause, which springs from, and goes be-
yond, the presence, is the jEx-e-diction.
1. Rudiction — the idea of place. 1
2. £-diction — the idea of presence. > {at this report.)
3. JSx-e-diction — the idea of cause. j
1. " He was troubled [at this report.^^)
Remark.
That the pupil may be exercised in the analysis of the condictions
of nepoeclads, I shall give three places, or classes to which each ne-
poeclad may be referred in the order, and upon the basis, of the three
parts of its condiction.
(The three parts — Rudiction, E-diction, Ex-e-diction.^ 8
8^t
CONDICTION OP NEFOECLADS.
These places, or classes are,
1. Rudicatory.
2. E-dicatory.
3. Ex-e-dicatory.
1. Rudicatory.
The liudicatory is a class to which a nepoeclad is
referred upon the basis of its rudiction.
2. E-dicatory
The edicatory is a class to which a nepoeclad is
referred upon the basis of its ediction.
3. Ex-e-dicatory,
The exedicatory is a class to which a nepoeclad is
referred upon the basis of its exediction.
These three Dicatories are subdivided by the use
of technicals which express the traits of Rudicative,
E-dicative, and Ex-edicative, character.
1. The Rudicatory is divided into Local, •Adver-
sative, Causative, Sotcrcitive, Conjunctive, Detrac-
tive, Continuative, Themitive, Exclusive, Charac-
teristic, Auditive, and Passionative.
2. The Edicatory is divided into Positional, Ap
proximate. Presence, Themitive, Vocational, Frank,
Independence, Plus 8fC.
3. The Exedicatory is divided into Elevative, Ex-
cessive, Pride, Preferal, Superiority, Compensative,
Contradictive, Preventive, Resistive, Conducive,
Partial, Service, Procurative, Proprius, Sourcitive,
Adversative, Positional, Minus, and Subjectional.
(See the table in which the subdivisions of each
Dicatory are methodically presented.)
Specimen,
1. "He was troubled {at this report.'')
(at this report,)
A plenary unbroken nepoeclad of the Local RudicvLioxjy Presence
Edicatory, Causative Exedicatory.
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS. ' 87
APPKOPBIATIOIT OP IMOKOS.
The appropriation of monos is the referring of the
monos of a poetrone to their respective classes, or places, by
applying to them their respective Syn-dic-o-log-ic-al namesv
SPECIMEN.
"(By grace) [are ye saved] ( , , ) (through faith.")
1. Are ye saved,
A plenary unbroken trone, of the affirmative cordicatory.
2. by grace,
A plenary, unbroken nepoeclad, of the local rudicatory, instrumen.
tal edicatory.
Gnometic reading ; [Ye are saved] {by grace. )
3. which Cometh,
A plenary, unbroken poeclad, affirmative cordicatory.
Gnometic reading : (By grace) (which cometh.)
4, through faith,
A plenary, unbroken nepoeclad, local rudicatory, medium edicatory.
Gnometic reading: (which cometh) (through faith.)
[Ye are saved] (by grace) (which cometh) (through
faith
Doctrine. — Grace is the instriunent or means by which ye are
saved; s.nd faith is the medium through which the grace comes. We
procure the instrument which is employed in this saving act, by
another instrument whi^h is called faith.
The idea may be better seen from the following :
(By books) [are ye instructed] ( , > )
(through the press.)
That is,
(By books) [ye are instructed,] (which come)
(through the press.)
[Ye are instructed] (by books) (which come)
(through the press.)
1. (By grace) [are ye saved,] (through faith.)
2. (By books) [are ye instructed,] (through the
press.)
88
NEPOECLAD CONDICTION,
NEPOECLAD CONDICTION.
The condiction of those nepoe-
clads which commence with uboutf
is fully illustrated in the instances
that follow " about.''
1. The belt was -
2. " Bind them -
3. It was six feet
4. " Get you up from -
5. They were sitting -
6. " He went out
7. " Paul was -
" To open his mouth'
8. « They were
9. They were then
1 0. Every thing -
11. They stood -
12. His knife was not -
13. My father is -
14. I was speaking
15. He was reading
16. «I must be -
17. James was then
18. John is now -
19. He is wandering
20. Why go ye -
21. Scatter the sands -
Mout,
L Local Rudicatory.
II. PoSITIOISrAL E-DICATOBT.
(about his waist.)
(about thy neck.")
(about the trunk.)
II. Approximate E-dicatort.
(about the tabernacle.")
(about the fire.)
(about the third hour.")
(about to open his mouth.")
the nepoecorm of about.
(about to flee out) of the ship."
(about sixty men.)
(about you) is in order.
II. Presence E-DiCAxoBr.
(about the room.)
(about him.)
(about the house.)
II./rHEMITIVE E-DICATORT.
(about my brother's house.)
(about General Washington.)
II. VOCATIOHTAL E-DICATORT.
(about my father's business.")
(about his work.)
(about his writing.)
II. Erratic E-dicatort,
(about , f) from place to place.
(about , ,) to injure me.
(about , ,)
CO^DICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
89
The condiction of those nepoe-
clads which begin with above, is
illustrated in the instances which
follow " above"
Above.
I. Local
Rudicatory.
E-DICATOKT.
E-
SICjLTOBT
E-DICATORT.
E-DICATOBT.
11.
12.
13.
15.
16.
II. Positional
(above his head.)
(above , , .)
(above me.)
II. Fkank
(above boatd.)
II. IXDEPEITDBITT
(above board.)
•II. Plus
• (above an hour.)
• (above the sun*s brightness.)
• (above five hundred brethren.)
• (above six pounds.)
• (above many , .)
*III. Elevative Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
(above mean actions.)
(above disguise.)
*III. Excessive Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
• (above measure.)
*III. Pride Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
■ (above his business.)
• (above himself.)
*III. Preference Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
• (above all other things.)
- (above all , , .)
*III, Superiority Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
" The Lord thy God will
set thee - . - (above all nations.")
The law should be - - (above all men.)
1. My hand was
2. The powers which are
3. Henry then went -
1. His conduct was
2. They now live
3. They wrote copies -
4. The light was
5. He was seen by
6. The weight is now -
7. Hannaniah feared God
8. This man is -
9. A real gentleman is
10. They gave stripes -
He is now
Indeed he is almost
Give me peace
But
The condiction of those nepoe-
clads which begin with after, is
illustrated in the monos which
follow this nepoeclide.
I. Local
After.
Rndicatory.
1. These men stood one
2. He came
8*
II. POSITIONAI.
(after another.)
(after me.)
E-DICATORT.
Behind.
Behind, ^^ •'
90
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
1. He was named
2. He made this machine
3. Did he cut his coat -
4. John, have you come
5. I will send an officer
6. I have now come -
7. " Ye shall not go -
- 8. They walk -
9. They judge -
10. Does he consider things
II. Imcitiative E-bicatobt.
(after his uncle.)
(after that model.)
(after mine ?)
II. Objective E-dica.tobt
(after your book ?)
(after you.)
(after the papers.)
(after other gods.*')
II. ACCOKDAS-T E-DICATOaX.
(after the flesh.) .^^ . ,
(after the sight.) '
(after their real value ?)
II. The UiccLEAirsED Thitj-g
E-niCATORT.
U. Can you drink - - (after me?)
That is, can you drink from the same glass from which I have
drunk, without Jirst cleansing it.
Note. — Where after denotes time, it is not a nepoclide, but a nepeo-
ded; as, I will go after supper. That is, [I will go after] (supper
is over.) ^
The condiction of those nepoe-
clads which begin with acrossy is
illustrated in the examples fol-
lowing this nepoeclide.
1. He went
2. We looked -
3. There was a bridge
Across.
I Local Rudioatory, '-'*
II. POSITIOKAI. E-]>ICATOHI«
i across the street.)
across the river.)
(across the stream.)
Note. — Across is never blank in its Rudiction.
Illustration of the condiction
of the nepoeclads which begin
with amid, and amidst.
1. He is now - - -
2. I was - - - -
3. The shepherd was -
4. How could I comprehend
Amid, Amidst.
I. Local Rudicatory
II. POSITIOBTAE E-DICATORT.
(amid the waves.)
(amidst the shade.)
(amidst his flock.)
(amid all this confusion ?) -
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
di
Dlustration of the condictiou
of the nepoeclads which begin
with among, and amongst.
''^' 1. He is sending agents
2. " He sends his blessings -
3. He immediately went
4. And he is now
Illustration of the condiction of
the nepoeclads which begin with
aroundy and round.
1. There was a belt -
i: 2. They all sat •- - -
V 3. He has sailed -
4. They then went
5. They were seated -
6. The mother called her
children - -
7. They are now strolling -
8. They rove - - -
9. " They went -
10. They are fond of riding -
Illustration of the condiction
of the nepoeclads which begin
with at.
Among, Amongst.
I Local Rudicatory.
II. Distributive E-dicatobt
(among his friends.)
(amongst his enemies.")
(amongst the people.)
(among them.)
Around, Round,
I. Local Rudicatory.
II. POSITIOITAL E-DICATOar.
(aronnd his waist.)
(round the fire.)
(round the world.)
(around the hill.)
(round the table.)
(around her.)
n. Erratic E-dicatort.
(around the country.)
(round the world.) ^
(around , ,) about the camp. ''^
(round , , .)
At, (^Presence.)
I. Local Rudicatory.
*Il. Presence E-dicatobt.
(at church.)
(at the trial.)
(at home.)
(at ease.)
1. John was
2. I was (^present)
3. My father is not
4. They are now
That is, they are in the presence of ease.
5. They are now - - (at play.)
6. The pen is now - - (at hand.)
7. He was then - - - (at a loss) for words.
A loss for words was present.
8. The bill was to be paid - (at sight.)
9. I told you this - - (at first , .)
When the first time was present, I told you.
92 CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS
10. He is a poor tool - - (at best.)
When his best skiU is present, he is only a poor tool.
11. He made no reply - - (at all , ) to them.
That is, he put no reply into their presence, to all that passed, or to
all that was said.
12. He aims - - - (at this mark.)
•That is, his aim, or direction is in iki^ presence of this mark -
13. I shall not be there - - (at all events.)
That is, although all the events which are calculated to take me
there, shmild happen, should be prestnU should come up before me,
still I shall not be there.
14. He purchased the gloves - (at a small price.)
A price is a mark of value : there are various price, marks, and
sometimes for the same thing. The idea is, that these gloves were
put into the presence of a small price mark. Where did the gloves
stand at the time of his purchase 1 That is, against what price mark
did they stand? They were in X\ie presence of a lovr price mark.
15. I am - - - - (at your service.)
That is, I am in i)[iQ presence of your service — I am not absent from
your service ; but present with it.
16. lam - - - - (at your command.)
That is, I am in ihe presence of your command — ^I am in the presence
of your command to yield obedience to it. The idea of obedience is
inferred from the declared presence,
17. You shall return - - (at my cost.)
That is, my cost, my money shall be present to pay the charges of
your return. Or my money shall not shrink away, but shall be in the
presence of the demand which may be made of you for your return.
18. It was done - - - (at his suggestion.)
That is, his suggestion was present in the character of a caxtse, and
produced this act. ^
19. He deserves well - - (at our hands.)
That is, while he is in the presence of us, for "our hands^^ means
us, he deserves well. Presence here, is business, or concern with.
*III. Cvusitive Ex-e-dic-a-tory,
20. He was surprised - - (at this statement.)
That is, when this statement came into his presence, it caused
surprise.
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
n
21. He was troubled
22. He was much pleased
23.
24.
25.
26.
He is now
He is a student
He is good
He was good -
27. He struck . r .^ -
28. They shot ^^^^1 -
29. He laughed -
30. They are - - -
31. They have long been
32. Texas is
33. He longs to be
Illustration of the condiction
of the nepoeclads which begin
with athwart.
1. He advanced his mis-
created front
2. The fleet stood
Illustration of the condiction
of the nepoeclads which begin
with before.
1. He stood - - .
2. He is not behind, but
3. "Wherewithal shall I come
4. They are now
5. " Abraham bowed -
1. "The world was all
That is, it was all at their choice.
- (at this report.) ^^ A
- (at this event.)
*in. Vocational Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
- (at the law.)
- (at law.)
- (at figures.)
- (at engraving.)
*ni. Hostile Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
- (at me.)
- (at him.)
* (at them.)
- (at variance.)
- (at swords' points.)
- (at war.)
- (at him.)
Athwart.
I. Local Rudlcatory.
II. Positional E-sicato&t.
(athwart my way.)
(athwart our course.)
Before.
I Local Rudlcatory.
II. POSITIOKAI. E-1)ICAT011T.
(before his desk.)
(before me.)
II. Preseitcb E-dicatobt.
(before the Lord.")
(before this court.)
*ni. Respect Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
(before the people) oftheland."
*in. Choice Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
(before them.")
Milton here puts the entire world
into the presence of our first parents, with the power to select such
as would best suit them. • - /
94
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
He that cometh after me,
is preferred
(before me,) [above me]
for he was before me
1. " And he set Ephraim -
2. " He esteemed virtue
3. " Poverty is desirable
Illustration of the condiction
of the nepoeclads which begin
with behind.
The syntax of this verse is not correct. The word, after, denotes
time, and is a nepoecled, not a nepoeclide, not a preposition. In the
second instance, the word, before, means time, and is a nepoecled, not
a nepoeclide. The plerocorme, me, then, should give place to 1:
[He (that cometh after) (I come,) is preferred] (6e/ore me;) (for
he was before) (1 was.) When before means place, preference, or supe-
riority, it is a nepoeclide ; in other instances it is a nepoecled.
II. Pkefiebitce E-dicatort.
(before Manasseh.")
(before gold.")
(before torments.")
Behind,
I. Local Rudicatory.
II. PoSITIOIfAI. E-DICATOaT.
(behind me,) Satan.''^
(behind the table.)
(behind that tree.)
(behind me.)
(behind , .)
(behind , .)
II. StTB-ATTAIUMEKT E-SICATORT.
(behind his brother.) >*
(behind my class.)
II. StTBHAITK E'SieATOKT.
(behind the very chiefest apos-
tles.")
•II. Slir-I-HEED E-DICATOHT.
(behind their back.") Heb,
xix. Without heed.
Sin-i, without.
n. Past E-dicatort.
1.
« Get thee
: hKiC',
.1-.,
2.
The book lies
3.
He sat -
-
4.
He rode
-
5.
He rode
-
6.
Look -
—
1. In Syntithology John is
2. In history I am
3. " I was not a whit -
4. " They cast thy laws
5. Forgetting those things
which are - - -
6. We should not forget what
is - _ - -
(behind , .) Phil, iii.
(behind , .)
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS. 95
» J i:ii ^u * 11' Future E-dioatoby
7 7. "And fill up that ^. .
which IS - - (behind , , ) of the afflictions
of Christ in my flesh."
8. Alas ! we do not know
what is - - (behind , .)
9. Is there much evidence
yet - - - (behind , ?)
l(h We know not what
evidence is - - (behind , .)
II. Deficit E-dioatory.
11. There is a small sum (behind , , .J
12. There are sixty dollars (behind , , .)
II. Antiabandonment E-dica-
13. He has gone, and left toby.
us - - - (behind , .)
14. ^e went there, but left
us - - - (behind , .)
Note. — The omission of behind would convey the idea that he had
abandoned us, totally deserted us.
He has gone^ and left us.
The word, behind, is a preventive against the idea of an abandonment —
hence the class to which this mono is referred, is denominated antiaban-
donment. The word, behind, in cases like the above, shows that there
is not an abandonment of what is left, by the leaver; as, I have left my
trunk behind. But, then, I have not abandoned it even so far as this
journey is concerned ; for, by the word, behind, I show thai I expect the
trunk will be conveyed to me. The trunk, then, is not abandoned by me^
I went to New York, where I left my trunk, and proceeded
to Boston.
The idea here expressed, is that, so far as regards my journey from
New York to Boston, there is an abandonment of my trunk. If, however,
the nepoeclide, behind, should be inserted after the poeclade, left, the
sense would be that I left the trunk under the idea that it would, by some
means or other, follow me to Boston. I went to New York, where I left
my trunk behind, and proceeded to Boston. Behind puts the trunk on
the way, on the road — and why should it be put upon the way if it is not
to follow ? Let us illustrate the use, and power ofbehind, in putting things
on their way to places : " Why did your father not come ?" He is just
behind." "Ah! he is coming, then." Behind puts things on their
way ; and consequently, prevents the notion of an abandonment.
In illustrating the word, behind, Mr. Webster says, *'A man dies, and
CfONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
leaves his estate behind^' But as there is no Bible doctrine that a
maai's property follows him into the other world; it is not right in
ifAeo/o^i/, to express such an idea!
A man dies, and leaves his estate.
Illustration of the condicliott Below.
of the nepoeclads which begin _ t «««.i i>»^j^»«^.».
with below. ^ ^ocal Rudicatory.
II. Positional E-DicAxoay.
- (below the heavens.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
The earth is -
The chin is -
Man lives
Man is the fairest one
He hit - - -
The water is -
The water is -
He purshased it
This note is -
(below the mouth.)
(below , , .)
(below , , .)
(below the mark.)
*II. Minus E^dicatokt
(below the mark.)
(below the banks.)
(below the first cost.)
(below par.)
*III. Subrank Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
(below me) in the class.
(below a captain.)
He is - - -
A lieutenant is
He appealed from the
court - - - (below , , .)
[He appealed] (from the court) (which is) (below this court.)
Illustration of the condiction
of the nepoeclads which begin
with beneath.
1. He stood - - -
2. The earth is -
3. He had a cushion -
4. The earth from
5. Has he conducted -
6. This act is -
7. He was
8, They will sink
9. Did Milo sink
Beneath.
I. Local Rudicatory.
II. Positional E-dicatory.
(beneath the branch.) under.
(beneath the heavens.) under.
(beneath him.) under.
(beneath , .)
II. Unwoutht-of E-bicatort
(beneath his station ?)
(beneath a gentleman.)
(beneath her notice.)
*II. Onkrous E-dicatort
(beneath their burden.)
(beneath the ox) which he car
ried on his back ?
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS. 97
li. SUBRANK E-DICATORY.
10. An ox ranks - - (beneath a man.)
11. Man is - - - (beneath angels.)
* III. Oppression Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
12. "Our country sinks (beneath the yoke.")
13. We have sunk - (beneath this taxation.)
14. He was borne down (beneath the burden) of hU sins.
Illustration of the condic- Beside.
tionofthe oepoeclads which I. Local Ru-dicatory.
begin with beside. U^ Positional E-dicatory.
1. He sat - - - (beside me.)
2.They were seated - (beside the stream.)
n. Addition E-dicatory.
3. - - - - (Beside all this), there is a great
gulf between «s, and you.
The rich man makes application to father Abraham for mercy ; and in
the application he desires Abraham to send Lazarus that Lazarus may dip
the tip of his finger into water, and cool the rich man's tongue. In verse
25, Abraham gives a reason to the rich man for not complying :
" Son, remember that thou in thy lifetime receivedst thy -good, things;
and likewise Lazarus evil things : but now he is comforted, and thou art
tormented."
In verse 26, father Abraham says, along with, or by the side of all this
excuse, ** for my non-compliance, you must place the fact that there is a
great gulf between us and you, which prevents all intercourse." And as
this last reason for the noncompliance is placed beside the first, the last is
added to the first — hence the idea of addition which is so prominent in this
nepoeclad. Beside all this, between us and you there is a great gulf
fixed. That is, in addition to all this reason for my noncompliance there
is a great gulf between us and you.
II. FOREIGN-FROM E-DICATORY.
4. *' It is - - - (beside my present purpose) to en-
large upon this subject.^*
How is it shown that " to enlarge upon this subject'^ is not my present
purpose 1 By taking this act out of, or away from, my present purpose.
And how is this act taken out of my present purpose 1 Simply by remov-
ing the act out from the purpose to the side of the purpose. It is beside
my present purpose to enlarge upon this subject. " To enlarge upon
tfus subject" is not my present purpose. I show this fact by removing the
act from my present purpose. How far do I remove it from my present
purpose] Just out on the side way of my present purpose—just far
flDough to show that this act ia foreign to the purpose.
9
915 CONDICTION OF BIEPOECLADS
II. Loss E-DICATORY.
5. John is - - - (beside himself.)
6. " Paul, thou art - (beside thyself.'*)
Whatever becomes useless is generally cast aside. Thus a broken, uae-
fess vehicle is often seen beside the street, or highway in which it was wont
to be used. So it is with human beings who have become useless from the
loss of their reason, or virtue. They are removed from themselves, and
placed on the sideway of themselves: beside themselves. To show that
John has lost his reason, and is consequently useless, he is taken out of him-
self, and put beside himself. ' This is one of the many ingenious contri-
vances with which nepoeclads abound.
II. Exclusive E-dicatory.
7. To all - - - (beside , ) as much an empty
shade.
To all beside. . That is, to all beside this, to all except this ; to all but
this; to all exclusive of this. r.
8. I saw nothing - - (beside this book.)
niat IS, I saw nothing except this book. In other words, except, ex-
clude, take away this book, and I saw nothing. It may be well to make a
remark, or two upon the source of this import of beside. This application
of beside springs most naturally from the primary, the local import, of this
nepoeclide. Beside under its primary meaning, under its general significa-
tion, denotes a side place, or a place on \h.e side; as, James stood beside
the street
Here, James is excluded from, kept out of the street by the word, be-
nde. This word places James on the side of the street — and thus it ex-
cludes him from the street. Should the word, in, be used instead of beside,
the position of James would be quite different ; as, James is in the street.
In is inclusive ,• beside is exclusive. From the general capacity of be-
side to move one thing out from another in place, this nepoeclide has ac-
quired the special power of denoting the exclusion, separation of one thing
from another where there is no idea of place in the mind ; as, I have no
property beside this lot. That is, exclude this lot from my property, and
I have no property.
The word, beside, howev&T m^y mean addition, instead of subtraction,
exclusion ; as, I have a lot beside this lot. That is, I have a lot in addition
to this- lot. ,
Where beside is exclusive, but, except, or excepting can be substituted
for it ; as, I have no property except this lot.
Where beside is additory, except can not be substituted ; as, I have a lot
except this lot !
Illustration of the condic- SJeyOTlCl.
tion of the nepoeclads which I. LOCal Ru-dicatory«
begin with beyond. n. Positional E-dicatort, ,
I. He went - - (beyond that tree.)
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
99
2. He travelled far
3. My stick reached
4. "Let no man go
brother. ^^
(beyond that river.)
(beyond his , .)
(beyond , , ) and defraud hh
* III. Future Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
) (beyond us) even before our death.*
POJB.
* III. Infeasible Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
beyond my power.)
beyond human comprehension.)
beyond his power.)
* III. Super Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
9. Washington was great (beyond any other man.)
5. ["A thing] (
6. To comprehend this is
7. This doctrine is
8. To pay this note is -
(beyond all others.)
(beyond what , ) (
)(
10. This matter is myste- (beyond any other
rious * - -
11. This night is dark -
12. Let no man think that
he is wise
is written.)
Illustration of the condio
tion of the nepoeclads which
begin with 6y.
1. He came
2. There have been great
battles - - - (by water.) on water.
3. We shall return - (by wateh) on water.
t. Local Ru-dicatory.
■Oy. (near to.)
I. Local RuHiicatory.
n. Positional E-dicatory.
(by land.) on land.
(by mine
(by the fire.)
•)
4. His house stands
5. 1 was sitting -
6. I stood -
7. The man had come - (by this time.)
That is, the coming of the man was bi/, or at this period of time: the
coming is represented as being as near to this particular period of time
as I am to the fire, in the fifth example: I stood by the fire. **By this
time the man had come.'*
8. He just passed
9. Who passed -
10. A gentleman was
11. Was any one -
(by the river side.)
(1 ■ ■ ■
!by the window.)
by . ?)
* n. Presence E-dicatort.
the time,
the time?
(by , )at
(by , }at
100 CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS* ;
12. Joseph remained there *' (by the space) of seven years/*} :
That is, he remained in the presence of this amount of time. Th»
may be illustrated by the following instance :
" John remained by a pile of thirty logs."
Here there is a pile which is made up of thirty logs ; and John remained
in the presence of this pile. In the case where Joseph is represented as
remaining in the presence of a pile, the pile is not composed of logs, but
of years. Seven years are rolled together; and, as John remained in the
presence of the pile of logs, so Joseph remained in the presence of this
pile of years.
It is worthy of remark that in order to use by in cases like that in the
1 2th instance, the time must be made into a pile, a mass ; for we can no4
say, he remained there by seven years. This word, in such instances as
the above, is not, as Mr. Webster, and others say, synonymous with dur-
ing f for we can say, He remained during seven years.
* III. Obligation Ex-e-dic-a-tory .
Obligation is the binding power of a vow, an oath, a promise, an of"
Jirmation, or a contract And to secure this power, the vow is made, oi
the oath taken by witnesses. That is, in the presence of witnesses.
13. He swore - - (by heaven) to be just.
That is, in the presence of heaven.
14. He affirmed - - (by all) that is sacred.
That is, he affirmed in the presence of every thing sacred. Or in other
words, he called every thing which is sacred into his presence to witness
against him if he should disregard his affirmation. I affirm in the pre-
sence of men, and angels that this was not so.
Again. — He declared before his God that he would tell the truth. That
is, he declared in the presence of his God. He called God into his pre-
sence to witness against him should he not tell the truth. I swear by earth.
That is, I swear in the presence of earth that you may have a host of
witnesses against nw if I do not speak the truth. I swear by all that is
good and bad. That is, I swear in the presence of every thin^ that there
may be nothing which will not be able to testify against me if I swerve
from truth in my statement. Or I go into the presence of every thing, that
every thing may cry shame, shame, if I open my mouth to utter a lie upor»
this subject.
Because God could swear by no greater, he swore by himself. That
is, because God could swear in the jM-esence of no being greater than him-
self, he swore in the presence of himself that he himself might be a wit-
ness against himself in case of a failure to fulfil that which he bomid
himself by an oath to accomplish.
That by denotes presence in the above instances, is obvious from its
sense in several compound words; as, bystander. When the oath is
taken, beings, and things are called up as bystanders to witness the act
* III. Criterion Ex-e-die-a-tory.
15. The stick is too long (by an inch.) '^
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS. 101.
That is, the overplus expressed by the words, too long, occupies the en«
tire presence of an inch. The philosophy of the process is this :
We first express a redundancy, " too long" — and, because this is indefi-
nite, we lay down, or bring forth a definite measure, inch. And to bring
this overplus alongside of this inch to measure it, we place bi/, which
means in the presence of, before this criterion. This is an ingenious ope-
ration, yet it is as simple as is that of measuring a board by a rule. The
only difference between the two, is this : in measuring a board the carpen-
ter carries the rule into the presence of the board,- but in measuring an
overplus in speech, the speaker brings the overplus into the presence of
the rule.
(overplus.) criterion.
16. The tea is too heavy (by six pounds.)
Here the writer is presumed to know the exact amount of the overplus ;
and to communicate this amount to the reader, he, the writer, carries thi«
overplus into the presence of the measure, six pounds, by means of by.
As much as to say — ^reader, there is too much tea — and if you will take
this too much, and place it alongside of this standard, this measure,
six pounds, you will learn the exact amount of this overplus. In what
way is the reader informed that this overplus is to be carried into the pre-
sence of this measure, six pounds ? By the word, bi/. This word means
presence, or presence of; as, was any one by when he told you 1 Was any
one present whejn it happened 1 Was there any bystander ?
* III. Terms Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
The monos which fall under the Terms Ex-e-dic-a-tory, are by the percJi,
by the yard, by the pint, &c. From a slight glance at these nepoeclads
it may seem that Quantity is better calculated to express the leading idea
of these monos than Terms. The word, quantity, is certainly well calculated
to denote the addiction of the cormes in such monos. But the abdiction
of a word, and the condiction of a mono, are different things. The idea
of quantity is the mere abdiction of the word, pint, perch, yard. But
quantity is not the condiction of the nepoeclad in the following sentence :
" He works (by the perch.")
■ The point is not what does the word, pcrcA, mean ; but what does the
mono, by the perch, import. This nepoeclad fixes one of the ternUt
one of the conditions on which the contract is made between the parties.
" He sells brandy (by the pint.")
The word, pint, means a certain quantity ; and the mono, by the pint,
converts this certain quantity into one of the conditions on which the peif-
Bon sells this liquid poison.
By the day, by the year, by the job are all of the Terms ex-e-
dic-a-tory.
17. He works - - (by the perch.)
That is, hb labour, \aa price, his attention, and his contract is brought
up, not into the presence of the whole road, the entire distance, but simply
into the presence of a perch. He is there, his presence is confined to a
perch at i» time.
9* ' ■ .
102 CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
*I1I. Conformity Ex-e-dic-a-tory,
\%. This fact appears - (by John's own statement.)
That is, this fact appears even while we remain in ihe presence of John's
own statement. Hence it is not necessary to leave John's statement for
that of another person in order to make out this particular feet.
19. Does he live - - (by any fixed rules ?)
That is, does he keep in the presence of any fixed rules in living.
There may be fixed rules which he may leave by living contrary to them.
But, when he adheres to fixed rales he remains by them. That fey m theii
presence.
It may be well enough to remark that great attention should be paid to
the difference between abdiction and condiction. The abdiction of the
word, ruk, ami the condiction of the mono, " by ruk,'^ are very different.
The idea which "ru/e" raises in the mind, is that of ai guide in action. Ba4
the idea which the mono, "by rule" raises in the mind, is that of conform-'
ity tov To be in the presence of a rule unplies a conformity to it — hence
the idea oi conformity expressed in the monto, " by ruk.^^
* III. Immediate-Pos&ession Ex-e-dic-aHory,
20. He has a cask of wine (by him.)
21. He had thirty dollars (by him.)
That is, the v
) to good.
5.
He looked down
- (from , ,
)
, , above.
-That is, (from the place) (which is) above.
0. He came - - (from , , ) beyond.
That is, he came (from a place) (which is) beyond the river, or beyond
any other thing which the sense will justify.
7. Call the dog - - (from , , ) , , under the table.
That is, call the dog ((rom the place) (which is) (under the table.)
* III. Sour citive Ex'S-dic-a-tory
8. Light proceeds ^ - (from the sun.)
9. Men have all sprung (from Adam.)
10. Water springs - (from the earth.)
11. Money is acquired - (from industry.)
12. He descended - (from a noble race.)
13. All things sprung - (from God.)
14. This light is - - (from that lamp.)
15. *'And - - - (from this , ) it seems that he
, is not dead."
16. This yarn v^ras spun (from that wool.)
17. Can any good thing
come - - - (from Nazareth.)
That is, can Nazareth be the source, the parent of any good thing ?
Illustration of the condiction /^^
of the nepoeclads which be- I. LOCal Ru-dicatory.
gin with in. * Ij^ Positional E-dicatory.
1. The horse is - - (in the stable.)
2. The horse is - - (in the harness,)
3. The horse is - - (in the carriage.)
4. The fork is - - (in the knife case.)
5. Henry is good - (in deed.)
That is, Henry is not only good in repute, but he is good in his deeds,
in his acts. In other words, let Henry remain within his deeds, and he is
a good man. You need not drag him out of his deeds into his reputation
to make him good — standing in his deeds he is good. There are many
men who, to be made goodf must be removed from their deeds into their
reputation.
The mono, ''in deed," means truth, and that too with much ease, and
with striking propriety ; for, if a man is good in deed, in act, he must be
good in truth.
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS. 107
6, Washington was great (in fact.)
That is, he was not only great in reputation, but he was so in fact. The
post-position of this mono is important to the expression of this exact idea ;
for, if this mono should be placed before the trokb the distinguish-
ing peculiarity of the idea would be lost.
In fact, Washington was great. This sentence conveys no allusion to
what he was in reputation.
The word fact, strictly speaking, means a deed done — ^hence we see why
the mono, " in fact," is synonymous with the mono, in truth.
" Washington was great in fact."
Many are great when you measure them in their reputation, but quite
small when you measure them in truth, in fad;, iii deed. Washington,
however, was great in both places — in reputation, and in fact.
7. These balls are alike (in size.)
That is, the similarity between the two balls, lies in the size. If you
go out of the size, no similarity is found. They are alike. But where is
the likeness T It is within the limits, the boundaries of the size. Outside
of these limits, no likeness is found. The likeness, then, is in, or within
the size.
8. God will judge all - (in that hour.)
That is, the act of judging all will fall into this specified point of time
In other words, this act will come within this measure of time.
We put apples into baskets, but events into hoursj days, weeks, ice.-'
9, One - - - (in five.)
The mono, " in five" as here used, means a family of five individuals
The expression, one out of five, is sufficient to show the local import of the
mono in five.
10. He is - - - (in that office.)
That is, his province falls within the circle of duties, which that ofiice
comprises.
11. John is - - - (in sight.)
" In sight" means that space over which the eye may extend m the act
of seeing : and John is within or in this space.
12. John did right - (in replying) to me.
That is, he did right in the act of replying. Every person is either in
or out of acts: he who does acts, is in them — and he that does not do them,
is out of them. There is, then, an in, and an out to an act ; and these
places are large enough to hold the agent, whether he is a fly, or an e/e-
,phant. The in is just as large as the agent himself — and the out is as
large as the universe !
* III. Condition Ex-e-dic-a-tory*
13. The horse is - - (in a good case.)
108 CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
In is the name of a place: the m of a room, is all that space which fallg
tvithin the walls that divide this in, this in space, from all other spaces. The
in of a stable is that place which falls within the walls of the stable. It is
easy to see that a horse may occupy the in of a stable : nor is it hard to
see that a horse may occupy the in of a harness. But to see in what
way a horse can be said to occupy the in of a good case, the zV* of a good
condition, demands thought. Nor is this the only point which demands
reflection, for it is not easy even to find the in of a good condition. The
in place of a stable is obvious, but the in place of a good case is obscure,
" The horse is in a good case, ^^
That is, he has a good coat of flesh on him — ^he is enveloped in a good
eoat of flesh. This envelope of flesh in which the horse is wrapped, is
called a case.
The fork is in the knife case.
It may be said, however, that the two monos, " in a good ease," and "in
a knife case" differ in condiction.
One mono, it may be said, marks the condition of the horse ; the other,
the place of the fork. In what way does the writer mark the condition of
the horse ? By putting him into a good case. From knife cases, we have
formed condition cases ; and to indicate the condition of an animal, we
exhibit him in one of these condition cases. " In a knife case" marks in
what case the fork is : and " in a good case" marks in what case the horse
is. One great difference between these two kinds of cases, springs from
the different mechanics by whom they have been formed : one is con-
structed by the mind, the other by the hands. The knife case is made
from wood, and by the hands : the condition case is constructed out of
thought, and by the mind. But does it follow, because the condition
cases are made of different materials, and by different workmen, that a horse
can not be in them just as much as a fork can be in a knife case ? If a house
is constructed in the m,ind only, has it not an in place ? and can not a man
that is created in the mind only, be made to occupy the in place of this
imaginary temple 1
14. John is kind - - (in sickness.)
That is, if cases of sickness surround him, he is kind. In other words,
where John's fellow-beings are in the condition of sickness, he shows his
kindness, exhibits, manifests his kindness within this condition.
15. He is " , -. - (in good spirits.)
That is, he stands in the coiiditibn of mind, which is denominated "good
spirits."
16. He is - - - (in good health.)
That is, he is in that state, or condition of body, which is called, "good
health.
17. Henry is - - (in pain.)
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS. 109
Is Henry in the- pain, or is the pain in him 1 the pain is certainly in
Henry. Hence Henry is in a painful condition. *^In pain" does not
mean pain, but this mono means a condition arising frorn pain. Now, it
is not the joatn which is in this painful condition, but it is Henry himself:
hence to say that " Henry is in pain," is both according to truth and Syn-
tax. There is, then, a difference between the addiction of the word pain,
and the condiction of the mono in pain. " Pain" means the sensation
itself — " in pain" denotes the condition, which the sensation produces in
the animal, or part in which the pain is.
18. The man is - - (in a severe fit.)
19. John is kind - - (in sickness.)
20. He is - - - (in good spirits.)
21. Henry is - - (in a high fever.)
22. He is - - - (in good heart.)
23. He is - - - fin good courage.)
24. He did it - - (in good faith.)
25.. He was - - (in his right reason.)
26. He is - - - (in the darkness) of the night.
27. He is - . - (in doubt.)
28. He was - - - (in fear.)
To the upright there ariseth light (in darkness.)
29. I command you - (in the name) of the people of
Pennsylvania.
30. I got the wine - (in John's name.)
In the first place, it seems important to arrive at the exact condiction of
the mono, in the name, as found in the above instances. " In the wawe"
b a .merologue for it is apart put for the whole. The simple mono, " in
the name," stands for the entire paper of commission. It is the name, the
signature of him who imparts power, which renders the paper specifying
the powers imparted, valid, efficient. Hence his name is used as the entire
commission.
" In the name of Jesus Christ of Nazareth, I command
you to rise up, and walk."
That is, in the commission of Jesus Christ, &c. I command you.
Why is the mono, *' in the name," used 1 because the efficiency of the
entire letter of commission, lies in the name, in the signature.
What is a commission ?
1. A commission is, "letters patent, or any writing from
proper authority, given to a person as his warrant for exercis-
ing certain powers, or for the performance of any duty,
whether civil, ecclesiastical, or military."
2. The state of that which is entrusted ; as, *' The great seal
was put into commission.'"
10
110 CONIUCTION OF NEPOECLADS.
It may be well for you to take particular notice of the fact that the word,
commission, in the above, and in the following, means a state, a condition .•
. 3. The state of being authorised to act, or to perform ser-.
vice ; as, the ship is put into commission.
The power of the commission puts the ship into a state, or condition to
act — ^hence this condition is called commission. The ship is put into com-
mission. That is, she is put into a state to act in buying, or selling, or
in exporting, and importing, in the name of another person. Now, as we
say, the ship is put into commission ; so we say, the ship is in commission.
And, as "in the name," means that state, or condition which the commis-
sion produces, it is obvious that " in the name" is just as much local, and
positional in its condiction, as is, " in the state," " in the condition."
1 . John is in a bad state.
2. Joseph is in a bad condition.
A state, n condition, is that which surrounds him, — that in which he is —
hence we say m a state, in a condition. If, then, you consider that " in
the name" means a commission, and that commission means a state, a con-
dition, you will understand why it is that in is used instead of Z>y. A
man does not command 6y his condition, but he commands in his condi-
tion. A man receives power, authority to command — this authority puts
him into a condition to act ; and, in this condition, not by it, he does act.
I got the wine (in John's name.)
" In John's name" means that condition, or state into which John's
commission puts me to act.
31. The apple is - - (in three pieces.)
* III. Belonging-to Ex-c-dic-atory.
1. There is carbonic acid (in coal.)
2. Latent heat is - (in air.)
3. There is nourishment (in bread.)
4. We find the fishes - (in the water,)
5. and the birds - - (in the air.)
6. There are 1000 pages (in the book.)
7. There are three pieces (in the apple.)
Illustration of the condiction In tO. (in, and to.)
of the nepoeclads which be- I. Local Ru-dicatory.
gin with into. ^ 11^ Positional E-dicatorv.
1. He went - - - (into the house.)
2. I put the knife - - (into my pocket.) not in.
3. " Water enters- - (into the fine vessels) of plants.'*
4. I looked - - - (into the room.)
5. «* Put these ideas - (into other words.")
GONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS. HI
*III. Immersion Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
6. One river runs - - (into another.)
7. " They went down - (into the water.")
^ 8. He plunged - - (into the snow.)
9. He turned some water (into wine.)
* in. Conversion Ex-e-dic-a-tory,
.10. " He turned water - (into wine.")
11. "Command that these
stones be made - (into bread.")
12. Make this leather - (into boots.)
13. Reduce all these sub-
stances - - - (into one mass.)
*III. Infusion Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
14. *' Put more animation (into your composition.")
15. The instillation of ar-
dour - - . (into the mind.)
16. There is an infusion
of zeal - - - (into the mind.)
17. I dislike the infusion
of Gallicisms - - (into English.)
* HI. Mixture Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
18. "Put other ingredients (into the compound.")
19. How many ingredients
have been put - - (into this medicine.)
20. You should not put
horses, and sheep - (into the same drove.)
*ni. Condition Ex-e-dic-a-tory,
21. The child was fright-
ened - - - (into fits.)
22. Evidence puts us - (into a belief) of truth,
23. " We reduce many
distinct substances - (into one mass.")
24. Men are often enticed (into the commission) of crime.
25. "We are all liable to
be seduced - - (into error.")
26. The cup was broken (into several parts.)
27. The land was divided (into six lots.)
The whole land was placed in the six lots.
112 CONDICTION OF NEPOECiADS.
Illustration of the condiction ^JU'
of the nepoeclads which be- I« XjOC£il Ru-dicatory*
gin with off. II. Inoccupancy E-dicatory.
1. James is now - - (off his seat.)
2. James is not - - Toff his bed.)
3. James was - - (off his guard.)
" On his guard" is a common expression. "Off his guard '^ and " on
his guard*^ are opponents in condiction. What is the import of the word,
guard ? This word must mean something which a person can be on, — and,
if it means something which a person can be on, it means something
which a person can be off of. " He is on his guard." " He is off his
guard."
Men saw that a book which is on a table, is sustained, held up, kept from
felling by the table. From this result they have learned to place them-
selves on whatever they seek to support, to sustain, or protect them.
Hence they have come to place themselves on care, not at care, on care,
not under care, on care, not over care, when they seek care to sustain them,
to keep them up from danger, or trouble. The word, guard, means that
care, that heed, Uiat watching, that vigilance, which is exercised to prevent
surprise, or attack. The analogy between the table in sustaining the book,
and the guard, the vigilance, in sustaining, in protecting men from danger,
is so obvious that it is easily seen why men place themselves on their
guard. A house rests on, not at, not under, its foimdation : a man in dan-
ger rests on his guard. As the house is saved by being on the foundation;
£0 a man is saved by being on his guard.
II. Neighbourhood E-dica-
TCRY.
1. "They were seen - (off the Cape) of Good Hope.''^
That is, they were in the neighbourhood of the cape, near the cape.
Illustration of the condic- L/Tl.
tion of the nepoeclads which I, Local Ru-dicatory ■
begm with on. H^ Positional E-dicatory.
1. The paper is - - (on the desk.)
2. Some fell - - (on good ground.)
3. The ball rolled - (on the carpet.)
4. He plays - - - (on the drum.)
5. Joseph plays - - (on the violin.)
A violin is a musical instrument — from this fact it would seem to be
proper to use with instead of on. We do not say, he saws on a saw, he
cuts on a knife ; but he saws with a saw, he cuts with a knife.
A violin is as much an instrument as is a saw, or a knife. Yet, we say,
he plays on a violin j and he cuts with a knife. And to understand why
on, and not with, is used in agnomeclads which are founded upon a certain
class of instruments, the subject of the relation of one thing to another.
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS. 113
must receive considerable attention. A nepoeclad may be constructed,
formed, upon a thing which bears two different relations to the thing
on which the trone, or the poeclad to which the nepoeclad is con-
jected, is formed. For instance: industry may be a source, and an
instrument, or means. Hence we may say with propriety, /row indus-
try, and hy industry.
1. "These men accumulate money fiofn industry."
2. " These men accumulate money by industry."
In the first instance, industry is taken as the source whence the money
springs — in the second, it is taken as the instrument, or mea»s employed
by these men in procuring money.
The relation that the thing on which the nepoeclad is built, bears to
the thing in the super mono, is a subject on which he who desires to
become a good writer, should bestow much attention. It is from a clear
comprehension of the exact relation which the nepoeclad thing bears to
the Trone, or to the poeclad thing, that one is able to form the nepoe-
clads of proper materials. The relations which the nepoeclad things
bear to other things, are too subtle for the comprehension of him
who has no powers of reflection, and for him, also, who has these
powers, but who will not exert them.
1. "The fingers of his hand, are familiar with deeds qf
charity." (Cy his hand.)
2. " The fingers on his hand^ are familiar with deeds of
charity." {On his hand.)
Both of these nepoeclads are correct. The fingers bear a possessive,
a /jroperfy, relation to the hand — Xhey belong io the hand. Hence o/
may be used. And the fingers bear a local relation also to the hand —
they are on the hand. Hence on may be used.
In the following instance, the nepoeclad basis bears but one relation
to the trone :
He cuts (with a knife.)
The knife is the nepoeclad things or the nepoeclad basis ; and, as it
has an instrumental character only, some nepoeclide which denotes
the idea of instrumentality, or means, is the only one with which this
mono can be commenced.
In general, the nepoeclad beeis bears but one relation to other things ;
and, in erecting a superstructure upon this basis, we must commence with
a nepoeclide which will express this relation. To this principle, however,
there are exceptions; for there are instances in which the relation that the
nepoeclad thing bears to the action in the super mono, must be en-
tirely disregarded in constructing the nepoeclad mono. This is the case
where a particular nepoeclad is founded on a musical instrument : for
instance, the drum. The drum is an instrument which is employed in the
production of music — yet we do not commence the nepoeclad which is
founded on this instrument, with a nepoeclide that expresses the relation
10*
114
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
which this instrument bears to the act of producing the music. We do
not say John plays with the drum; but we say, John plays on the drum.
Men seem to have been so struck with the peculiarity of the fact that, in
making music by the instrumentality of these instruments, the hand, or
lips, the bow, or sticks are uniformly placed on the instrument, that they
commenced the mono with a ne/?oec/tca/.'
" My chair is (in the, moon.")
*
116 CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
Can it be argued that " in the moon" does not mean in the moon be
cause the thing which is represented to be in this planet, is not in it ]
Surely they who said to Pilate,
*'His blood be on us, and on our children,"
did not believe tbiat Pilate had the power to spot, to mark, them and all
their present, and future children with the blood of Christ! But does this
justify the position that "on us" does not mean on us— and that "on our
children" does not mean on our children T The Jews require the cruci-
fixion of Christ at the hands of Pilate ; but Pilate manifests a want of
courage, or a want of desire to gratify them. But the people, to indicate
their courage, and desire to perpetrate this deed, inform Pilate that they are
willing to do the act in the very faces of the most indubitable, and lasting
proofs of their guilt. Pilate says,
"I am innocent of the blood of this just pierson ; see ye
to it:' '
They reply,
- ** His blood be on us, and on all our children." , > -
That is, Pilate, you may show to the world that you are innocent of his
blood by marking us as his executioners. How mark them i By putting
his blood on them. What, put the blood actually on them 1 So is the
representation which is sufficient to settle the condiction of the mono.
The preceding remarks proceed on the ground that the import of the
language, " His blood be on us, and on our children," is that the blood is to
be put on the Jews as a teken, as the means of identity, as a proof thai
the people, and not Pilate, put Christ to death. I have taken this par-
ticular ground, not because I think it the theological idea, but becau>;e
i wished to examine the doctrine oi reality, and representation, as a cri-
terion in deciding on the condiction of monos. Having shown that -it is
the representation, and not the reality, of the thing represented, which
decides the condiction of monos, I shall now attempt to establish the
condiction of this mono, " oti ms," upon the theological basis. ^
17. " His blood be {on us,) and {on our children.")
That is, 4et the consequences of putting Christ to death, rest on us, and
on our children. Put the consequences of his crucifixion into the sustain-
ing position: we will pledge ourselves to sustain, to bear up, to support,
all the bitter results which you think will flow from the sacrifice that we
intend to make. Put these consequences, therefore, o?i us. " On us be all
the blame."
*n. Contact E-dicatory
18. " They will have compassion (on him.")
DocTBjNE. — They will touch him with compassion ; or they will bring
their compassion in contact with him. The idea of position does not seem
to enter into the condiction, for there is no intimation that the compassion
is to be applied to the upper part of the person. The prominent idea is
that of locating, of placing, compassion in contact with him.
Dr. Webster says that on means.
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS. 117
" Being in contaet with the surface or nppsr part of a thing ; as, my
book is on the table."
This is his first definition of on, and although it is lax, it may answer
the purpose of a Dictionary. But, although it may answer the purpose of
a Dictionary, it will not accomplish the object of a Syntax. The word, on,
is the name of a certain place which belongs to a great variety of objects.
Thete is one^lace which belongs to a table, that is named on. There is
another place which belongs to a table, that is named under, A book may
occupy both of these places ; hence we may say,
1. The book is 07i the table, and
2. The book is under the table.
Now, book is the name of a thing ; and tahU ia-the name of a thing—'
but on as well as under is the name of a place. And, as a noun is the
name of any person, place, or thing, on and under are as much nouns as
are book, and table /
Dr. Webster says on is the sign of a contact. "On," however, is the
name of a certain place the occupying of which produces a contact. The
word, on, is not the name of the contact — on is the name 6f the place
itself. It is true, however, that contact is a prominent trait in the condic-
tion of many agnomeclads which begin with on. But this idea is a derived
one : As the occupancy of the place of which on, under its primary mean-
ing, is the name, always produces contact, the idea of position, the idea of
upper, is lost, and the notion of contact acquired ; as, he appears on pub-
be occasions. That is, he does not remain at home, but comes out, and
connects himself with public occasions — he comes up to the occasions — he
puts himself in actual contact with the occasions as much as does he who
occupies the on of a stage, in contact with the stage. But, then, there is
no upper to the public occasions — hence the positional idea is lost. The
local idea, however, is still prominent, for he is placed up to the occasion.
19. He preached - - (on last Sabbath.)
Doctrine. — His act of preaching was in contact with that portion, with
that block of time, which is denominated, " last Sabbath." Or his action
was so placed, so heated, that it came in contact with last Sabbath. We
place matter in contact with matter, but events, in contact with time.
He spake on the stage on last night.
He on stage ,- spake on night.
His action was on last night.
That is, his action was in contact with the piece of time, which is here
called, last night.
He was on the stage.
That is, there was nothing between him, and the stage, to separate him
from the stage — hence he was on the stage.
The speaking was on last night.
That is, there was neither a thin, nor a thick portion of time which pre-
118 COiffDICTION OF NEPOECLADS. '
rented the speaking irom coming in contact with the n/g-/*^ here men-
tioned.
In reference to the places of things f we use ivheri; as, where is the
bookl on the table, ^
But, in relation to the place of events, we use when; as, tuAen was the
book placed on the table ] on last night.
When, then, signifies place in time — and where, place in. reference to
things. {English Syntascope, page \&Q.) -.'../ -r"^- - v
20. John retired - - (on your approach.) " *
DocTHiiTE. — The act of retiring came in contact with the act of ap-
proaching. That is, no portion of time fell between the two acts. The
act of retiring was so soon after the act of approaching, that not a parti-
cle of time fell between the two events: one came in ^d^ac/ with the
other. - '' : ■'; _ ■ --^ /• '''■',.- •-/■■;■ ■ - - ;■
21. "He was , - -^(on |he look out)jroi^ /iiwi.*'
22. They were - - (oc^lie alert.)
23. He is - - - (pi ^
24. He was - - - Ton gu|r|k)
25. They were - - (on th^ir guard.) ^ ;.';.' / , * . '
26. He appears - -• (on public o6casibns.) ;' '^ ;
Doctrine. — Whenever there i^ any public occeisitwh he cohnes in con-
tact with it — he comes out to it — he connects himself ^ith it. But Jio
keeps himself detached from all other occasions.- ^-^ • . T,i r. V
' • ; ■' -. ■ ''-- '-1 }. .
27.. We find ruin - - (on ruin.) ' >' ^ :
28. Men nieet with loss - (on loss.)
29. He suffered affliction (on affliction.)
30. The thunder came peal (on peal.)
31. He saw heap - - (on heap.) ^ ,
Doctrine. — Ruin was so frequent that nothing fell between one s|lne
of ruin, and another — hence ruin came in contact with ruin. ' , V v • ' '
One peal of thunder came so close to another that the second came in
contact with the first.
"Heap on heap." That is, heap stood so close to heap that t|tiere was a
contact among the heaps.
If the idea, however, is, that one heap stood on the top of aiiother, the
minocondiction is not contact, but positional : He heaped one heap on, or
upon another. ^
32. He came - - - (on a sudden.) ''
33. He came- - - Ton an errand) o/* 7pt;e. > ) ^ *■
34. The ship is - - (onshore.) . ''"^^^f/
'DocTRiifE. — His coming came in contact with our want of preparatHqi^ ^
— or his appearance came so near our state of unexpectedness that ms i
appearance came in contact with our state of unexpectedness. C
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS. 119
2. The errand was his business ; and he had come to that business — ^he
was at that business— yea, more, he was engaged in it — hftnce he was in
contact with it. Can a man be in water, and not be in contact vi'wh
water '? How, then, can he be in business^ and not be in contact with
business 1 .'
3. « On shore" That is, aground.
^\\\. Progression Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
35. He is now - - (on his way.)
Doctrine. — He^is now in contact with his way, with his journey, with
his aet of traveUingr And as he is in contact with his way, he makes pro-
gress in his Af ay. '
36. He-^as then - ^ (on the road.)
DocTjiiNE. — The word, road, may be considered, here, as meaning jour
ney, or way. In this case the doctrine' of the condiction is that he was
then .in contact with his traA)elllng. That is, there was not such a pause,
mich a cessation of action as is necessary to break one off from his jour-
,ney, or to produce a Want of contact bei^i;5eu him and his journeying act.
A 3ay 's rest Bt a friend's house, is not aWe to destroy the contact of the
traveller with his jou^CTjir^in short'he is in constant contact with it till
his place of destinaUo|i?ip reached, y - ^
But, if the word, roac/, as here used, means the highway over which he
travelled, the doctrine of the condiction is that he was in contact with the
fdghivay : he was on his road to Boston. That is, he had left home, and
entered the road with which he was in contact when I saw him.
37. He is -^ - '• ion the road) to fame.
38. They are -* ' - (on their way) home.
39. Henry was / - - (on his way) to ruin.
40. He is always - - (on the wing.)
41, He was - - - (on the alert.)
Where the idea is action ,- on the alert falls into the Progression Ex-e-
dicalory. But where the idea is that of vigilance only, this mono's con-
dition is exhausted at the E-dic a-tory. ,
Class t^e agnomeclads in the following gnomod *
^ 1. Tlie house was - {on fire.)
-!^. He is bent - - {on mischief .)
■> . II. Contiguous E-dicatory.
42h The ship was - - (on Galveston Island.)
43.^ Jefferson City is - (on the Missouri river.)
44. Vandalia stands - (on the Kaskaskia river.)
45. The British fleet - (was on the American coast.)
That is, near the American coast. / .
" The ship is on shore. That is, aground : contact^ •
120 CONDICTION OP NEPOBCLADS.
Illustration of the condiction \JV6T. . \
of the nepoeclads which be- I. LOCal Ru-dicatOry.
gin with over. II. Positional E-dicatory.*-
1. He held the umbrella Tover his head.)
2. The smoke rose - (over the city.)
3. The flag was waving (over our heads.)
4. «* The mercy-seat - (over the testimony.")
5. There was a window (over the door.)
6. The hat hung - - (over the table.)
* III. Meta* Ex-e-dic-a-tory.'
7. The cat jumped - (over the table.)
8. The deer jumped - (over the stream.)
9. TheVater ran - - (over the dam.)
10. The horse jumped - /over the fence.)
1 1 . The lad stepped - (over the pin.)
12. He went - - - (over , , ) to England. ^
13. He went - - - (over , , ) to the other party,
14. ** He remained - - (overnight.")
* Meta, from one side to the other.
*1II. Contact Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
15. He sailed - - (over the lake.)
16. They travelled- - (over all the earth.)
17. The cap was - - (over his face.)
18. We put cloths - - (over his hand.)
19. Spread a counterpane (over us.)
*III. Emersion Ex-e-dic-a-lory*
20. The water was - (over his head.)
21 Thesnovvwas- - (over his boots.)
* HI. Causative Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
22. "Devout men carried
Stephen to his burial,
and made great la-
mentation - - (over him.")
They were looking down upon him — hence they were over him as much as
the clouds are over our heads — and he was the cause of the lamentation —
hence the positional, and the causative traits in the condictive character of
this mono.
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLABS. 121.
- - II. Meta E-dicatorv.
1 He remained with me (over Sunday.) .
2. ** He kept it fresh - (over winter.")
3. Will you stay - - (over night?)
4. *' They prepared for ' '
each day- - - - (overnight.")
DocTniJfi:.— ^The things prepared passed from the beeinning to the end
of the night. Or, th« prepared state began on one side of the night, and
went over to the other side. '
They went over the river. That is, they went from one side to the other.
The prepared state did not go over a stream of water, but it -passed over a
stream of time. ,
I have placed this kind of mono under the Zoca/ Gefnecon-
dicatory. But, from an apprehension that some might not
see the local trait in its condictive character, I have placed it
under the Blank Local. (See Meta E-dicatory, under
Lo4iat Hu-dicatory.
* 11. Superiority . E-dicatory.
u',-\ . '^IW, Excellence Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
1. Christianity has ad-
vantages - - - (over every other religion.)
2. Has John an advan-
tage - _ - (over Joseph ?) r
3. '* Young Pallas shone
conspicuous - - (o'er the rest.")
4. What advantages has
learning - - - • (over ignorance ?)
5. What advantages has
Texas - - - (over the United States ?)
*III. Authority Ex-e-dic -a -tory.
6. Who put thee - - (over us ?)
7. "I will make thee
ruler - - - (over many things.")
8. "Thou shalt be - (over my house.")
^ III. Guardian Ex-e-dic-a-tory, ~
9. " Parents Avatch - (over their children.")
10. *' His tender mercies
are- - - - (over all his works.")
11. " Dost thou not watch (over my sin ?")
11
122 C0NDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
Over is frequently a nepoeekd, an adverb ,• as, He will pay over
the money to you.
In many instances, however, where from a slight glance, over
appears to be a nepoeded, it is a nepoedide,- as. How shall I get over?
That isi How shall I get over the ice, the river, the lake.
Will you appropriate the nepoeclad in the following 7?oe UfltO. {end.)
of the nepoeclads whidi be- I. Local Ru-dicatOry.
gpin with to and with urhto. n. Final E-digatohy.
1. John went - - (to church.)
DocTRXKB. — ^There are various places which belong to a church: there
is the under of a church, the in of a church, the on of a church, the over
of a church, the to of a church, the at of a church, the from of a church,
&c. &c. Now, there is one of these places which is called by three, or
more different names : these are to, at, from, and in. When the act ends
at this place, the place is called to ,- as, he went to church.
When the act begins in this place, the place is called from ,• as, he
came from church. And when the superior mono speaks, not of one's
going to, nor of his coming from church, but simply of bi« being there,
this certain place is called at; as, he is at church.
There is a place about a door, which is called by the name of to, at, and
from. When the door is approached, this place is called to ; as, he went
to the door.
When the door is kft, thievery place js cilied from ,- as, he went from
the door.
When a person remains in this ^w place, ai>d this from place, this place
is called at, or by,- as, he is at the t^
^ II. Positional E-dicatort.
1. " He found it - - (underneath this stone.") •
2. " The mole runneth - (underneath , , .")
Illustration of the condiction ^P-
of the nepoeplads which be- I. LoCal Ru-dicatory
gin with up. II, JPositional E-dicatgry
1. *' He is now - - (up the river.")
2. ** The squirrel is - (up the tree.")
If " down the river,*' is good, up the river, is not bad.
II. Space E-dicatort
1. "He was walking - (up the hill.")
2. " The squirrel ran - (up the tree.")
Up is generally a nepoecled. (See down.")
142 CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
Illustration of the condiction UpOU, Ofl. (up, and on.)
of the nepoeclads which be- I, XjOCdl Ru-dicatOry»
gin with upon. #11. Positional E-dicatory.
The dads which begin with on, and upon are not positional un-
less the condictive idea is that of location upon the surf ace as in the in-
stances under the head of Positional e-dicatory, and under the head
of Sttbject exedicatory.
1. James was seated - (upon a high hill.)
2. I was then - - (upon the house.)
3. Was he then - - (upon his horse ?) '
4. His hat was - - (upon his head.)
5. "He has his coat- - (upon his back.")
6. The basket hung - (upon his arm.)
. 7. We are now - ' - (upon battle gcound.)
8. Th.e gun was - - (upon his shoulder.)
9. He had a ring - - (upon his fore-finger.)
10. I put my hand - - (upon his shoulder.)
11. Lean your head (upon my arm.)
12. I have often been - (upon these waters.)
13. I have never seen finer
wings - - - (upon any bird.)
In all the above instances on is as good as upon,
*III. Material Subject Ex-e-dica-tory.
14. He "Struck - - {u^ioxi ihe iyhle) with his hand.
DbCTRii^E. — From the circumstance that the upun place, the sustain-
ing position, which belongs to the thing that is generally in some way
affected, influenced, by the thing which occupies this place, upon as well as
on has come to begin clads whose cormei^ are the names of things
which are the subjects of some material, or mental operation; as, " Have
you come out (upon me) with staves as (upon a thief P^^)
What is a subject ?
A subject is that on which some material, or some mental operation is
performed. Hence that on which a surgeon operates, is called his subject —
hence too that upon which one thinks, speaks, or writes, is called the subject.
15. They Struck - - (upon the ground.)
16. They beat - - (upon the house) till it fell.
17. They struck him - (upon his head.)
18. " The rain came down (upon us) in torrents.*^)
CONDKJTION OP NEPOECLADS. 14S
f II. Vague E-dicatory.
19. If you expect punc-
tuality - -. - (upon our part,)
20. I trust tjiat you will be
. punctual - - (on yours.)
21. He is - . - - (upon the other side) of the river.
22. He is now - - (upon this side) of the Delaware.
In these, and similar instances, the condidion of the clads which
begin with upon, and on, is general only. There is no position indicated.
Take the. clad in the first of the above instances.
I. If you expect punctuality upon our party I trust that you
will be punctual on your part. ^
" Upon our part," simply points out a place where punctuality is expected
to be found. But, then, there is no intimation that the punctuality is to be
found occupying any certain position in reference to our part. In the fol-
lowing clads, there is not only the idea of place, but of a definite
place, in reference to the clad thing:
1. Thehook is {under tJie table.)
2. The pen is (upon the ink-stand.)
But where we say that we will show punctuality upon our part, we do not
attempt to point out the exact position of this punctuality in relation to our
part — the idea is, that the person addressed may depend upon finding punc
tuality somewhere about our part — ^but whether it will be located under,
over, againsty ot in this part, is not decided by the language of the mono.
" John is about the house.''''
The exact relative position of John to the house, is not pointed out. He
is somewhere about the house : he may be in it, ho may be out of it ; he may
be under it ; he may be upon it ; and he may be over it. But the
clad, " ahout the house" does not decide his exact position, any more than
does the mono, " upon our part," decide the exact position of the punc-
tuality mentioned in the superior mono.
The condictionof clads which begin with upon, and onyU posi-
tional, only where the idea is tiiat of location upon the surface, as in the
following —
1. There were dark spotS' wjaon his skin.
2. There were red spots on the under cuticle of his feet.
•. He beat upon the drum.
Now, this does not mean that he beat upon the head of the drum — it
means that he struck upon the surface of the drum.
And, as the surface is a kind of skin which envelopes the entire instru
ment, a blow on any portion of the exterior, is a blow upon the drum.
4. John is upon the other side of the Delaware river.
There is no positional idea in the mono, "upon the other side " ,for the
idea is not that he is upon the surface of the other side.
144 CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
5. John was buried ^^uponthi other side*^ of the Delaware
river.
What, buried upon the surface ! this is not at all probable. In such in-
stances the idea is that the person mentioned in the superior mono, is some-
where about the thing mentioned in the inferior mono. He may be under
it, over it, on it, or in it. His exact position in relation to the thing in the
clad is left vague. -
23. I have made aa im- , ,
provement - ^ - (upon that lamp.)
This does not mean that the improvement is placed upon the surface of
the lamp — but that it is somewhere about the lamp. This sense is probably
derived from the general idea of the words from which on, and upon have
come :, approaching, coming towards, and even coming to a thing.
- , ■ \ ' * 'i\;-- '.'
till. Material Subject Ex-e-dioa-tdry,
24. i performed an opera- •
tion - - - (upon his arm.)
25. *' The Philistines be (upon thee,) Samson. ^^
26. They came out . - (upon me) ivith clubs..
27. I am engaged - - (upon this job,) ifo-(/«i/.
■jf. 11. Contact E-dicatory.
(See Note under Example 18, which begins with on.)
28. They were discharged (upon the first day) of June.
(See doctrinal notes upon Example IS, under on. Contact E-
dicatory.)
29. " You do this - - (upon pain). o/'rfea^^."
(Examine the doctrinal notes upon the clads which begin with
on. Edicatory.)
30. What was their con-
duct - - - (upon this occasion?)
(See the notel^upon Example 2€, under on.)
31. They will have com-
passion - - - (upon him.)
(See Example 18, under on. C. Mino.) ^
32. John will retire - (upon our approach.)
(See note under Example 20, which begins with on.)
33. He was - - - (upon the look-out) /or the ship,
(See Example 21, which begins with on.)
34. They were - - (upon the alert) all night.
(See « He is on the alert," Ex. 22.)
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS. 145
35. He is - - - (upon duty.)
36. He was - - - (upon guard.)
37. They were - - (upon their guard.)
38. He appears - - (upon all public occasions.)
39. We find ruin - - (upon ruin.)
40. Men meet with loss - (upon loss.)
(Read those notes upon these instances which begin withow.)
41. He suffered affliction (upon affliction.)
42. The thunder came peal (upon peal.)
43. He saw heap - - (upon heap.)
(See notes upon " pw Aeap," Ex.31.)
44. He came - - (upon a sudden.)
45. He came - - (upon an errand) q/* /ove.
(See note upon " on an errand^^ Ex. 33.)
46. The ship is - - (upon shore.) Not good— on is good.
Jin. Mental Subject Ex-e-die-a-tory.
47. My reflections - (upon your situation) have been
painful.
48. Consider well - - (upon the matter,) beforehand.
49. I have not thought
much - - - (upon the affair) since.
50. I shall not say a word (upon his treatment) toward me.
51. I will retire, and dream (upon the thing.)
52. His mind seemed fixed (upon this one point.)
(What {is }ie\ upon 1) (Upon what , ) is he ?
53. "He sent the officer- (upon a bold enterprise.")
54. The legislature is now (upon the banks.)
55. While I am - - (upon this subject,) / wilt remark.
56. I have given many
notes - . . (upon the condiction^ of ne-po-e-
clads.
57. Congress is now - (upon the pre-emption act.)
58. This is a treatise - (upon Texas.)
59. I have reflected much (upon this point) of the law in yow
case.
60. Blackstone has written
much - - - (upon the common law.) -
146 CONDICTION OP NEl^OECLADS.
61. Who has written a
sound work - - (upon the laws) of nations ?
62. In his speech he en-
larged - - - (upon this part) (/ ^Ac Mcmc.
63. The point - - (upon which) / desire to add one
word, is this.
64. He is bent - - {upon mischief.)
Some clads which begin with on belong to the following E-
dicatories, although these dicatories are not mentioned under on .♦
1. Basis f Subject, Presence, Belonging-to, Vague.
i III. Progression Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
65. He is now - - (upon his way) home.
Examine all the notes upon those dads which commence with on^
under the head of Progression exedicatory.
66. He was then - - (upon the road.)
67. He is - - - (upon the road) to fame
68. Henry was - - (upon his way) to ruin.
69. He is always - - (upon the wing.) '^^ •
70. He was - - (upon the alert.)
Where the idea is action, upon the alert falls into the Progression
Eisedicatory. But where the idea is that of vigilance only, the
condiction of this mono is exhausted at the Edicatory.
1. The house was - {on fire.)
Note. — The omisfiion of on, in instances like the following,
was not intended — hence you will bring these monos, when they
commence with on, under the Local Rudicatort, Cowtact Edi-
CATOHY, and Progression Exedicatory.
71. The horse came - (upon the full jump.)
72. The horses were - (upon a hard trot.)
73. My horse was - (upon a slow walk.)
74. His horae was - - (upon a gallop.)
{On the full jump,) {on a hard trot,) {on a slow walk,) {on a gallop.)
Note. — It may be well to say also that in treating of the agnomeclad*
which begin with on, there is no illustration of on in the Bbxcn oino-to
E-mCATORT.
1 . James is - - (on the democratic side.)
2. Joseph is - - (on the whig side.)
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS. 147
II. Contiguous E-dicatory
75. My father-was - (upon my right side,)
76. and my brother - (upon my left.)
That is, near to my side.
77. " There is a village - (upon the Thames.")
78. "Jefferson city is - (upon the Missouri river.")
On is as good as upon in these instances. There are instances, however^
where on must be used to the exclusion of upon. We do not say the ship
is upon shore, The house is upon fire.
n. Belonging-t6 E-dicatory.
79. James is - - (upon the other side.)
80. Joseph was - - (on the whig side.)
That is, belongs to the whig party.
II. Basis E dicatory.
I. "John depends - - - (upon me) /or mowei/."
Doctrine, — There are various /oca/ qualities, ^/ace attributes, which be-
long to things as much as do form, size, colour, &c. For instance, a table
nas an on as much as it has size ; and this on is as much a quality of the
table as is the size of it. Waits, and others who have written much upon
the subject of qualities, define a quality as follows : —
" A quality is that property which can not exist in, and of itself, but is
always esteemed as belonging to, and as5ubsistingby,the help of some sub-
stance which, for this reason, is called its subject." Does not the ow of a
table depend as much upon the table as does the size of it 1 Can that place
which is named cm be separated from the thing to which it belongs any more
than size, form, colour, &c. &c 1 I should be glad to see a philosopher at-
tempt to separate the on, the under, the over, the at, the to, the by, the/rowi,
the through, the iii, the beside, the beneath, of a table from the table, and to
make them exist in, and ot themselves ! He who attempts this work of ab-
straction, will find that the on, the under, the above, &c orthe table, have too
strong an affinity for their subject to leave it, and set up a separate, a distinct,
existence for themselves ! Let the old school grammarians, then, call on,
under, over, &c, adjectives/ An adjective is a word which expresses a
quality — and a quality is that which cannot exist independent of a subject,
a being-giving basis ! Now, the /oca/ quality, the pkice attribute, of which
upon is the name, or of which upon is the noun, (for name, and noun are
the same,) is the great sustaining place, the well known basis position of a
table, a chair, a foundation, and of all other things. The house is erected
upon, not under its foundation. From being the name of the place which is
always occupied when the subject to which this place belongs is made the
basis, the foundation, the support, of another thing, upon, and on have come
to be used where the clad thing, instead of having any jo/acc quality,
any heal attribute of any kind, bears a basis, a foundation, a stietaining.
148 CONmCTION OF NEP0ECLAD3.
relation to something mentioned m the supe. mono; as, John lived for
weeks upon bread alone.
Here the bread is the basis of the continuation of John's life. And upon
begins the mono where bread, the name of this basis, is used, because
upon, in its local character, is the name of that place which nniist be
occupied in order to make the thing to which it belongs, a basis.
2. I will remain - - (upon these conditions.)
That is, these conditions are the basis, the support, of my remaining.
3. " We hope to be for-
given - - . (upon our repentance.")
The basis of the hope is the repentance.
Why is upon used where the clad thing has no such
local attribute as wjoorj, and on, under \he\v primary meaning,
denote ? Because the clad thing bears the same basis
relation to something mentioned in the super mono, which
the thing that has this upon place occupied, must bear to the
thing which occupies it. " The book is upon the table."
The book occupies the upon place— -hence the table bears a
basis relation to the book. And, as the occupying of the upon
place renders the table a basis, upon is used before things
which do not possess the upon place which the table has, pro-
vided they bear the basis relation to something in the supei
mono, which the table bears to the book that occupies the upon
place of the table. In brief, the doctrine is this — From denot-
ing the basis position^, upon, and on, have come to convey a
basis allusion, d^ foundation import.
4. " It is written, Man
shall not live - - (upon bread) alone,
5. but - - - (upon every word) that proceedeih
out of the mouth of God. ^^
6. TVe think - - (upon the whole) that he will be
able to fxay his debts.
That is, the whole matter is the basis of this opinion : this opinion is
founded upon the basis of the whole matter.
7. " He borrowed money (upon his lands.)
8. I will loan money - (upon real estate security.)
9. " He was put - - (upon his good conduct.")
10. '* He was acquitted - (upon some informality) in the pro-
ceedings.^^
11. "Cattle live - - (upon grass.")
12. '* Paupers came - (upon the town,) like hail upon the
.ground J*^
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS. 149
13. Hooker took it (upon himself)^© pay his brother* s
debts,
14. We cannot have a
stable government - fupon this principle.)
15. " His cure depends - (upon his care.")
That is, his care is the basis of his cure.
16. He affirmed - - (upon his honour) that he would
return.
17. He declared - - (upon his oath.)
That is, he placed the truth of his affirmation upon the basis of an other.
In the illustrations which I have attempted to give of o^i, the instance*
like these are presented under the Local Rudicatery,
(See Example 13, and 14, under on.)
18. " He came - - (upon an hour's warning.")
DocTMBTE. — Every action requires time ,- for no action can be performed,
or done, without a longer, or a shortef, time in which to act. Hence, every
action depends upon time — therefore it is not very irrelevant to consider time
as a kind of basis on which actions are necessarily placed. Every event, as
has been said already, depends upon more, or less time — for without time,
no event can happen. Hence we are constantly appropriating different por-
tions of time to different events. Thisf action will require an hour ; that, a
day, &c.
He will draw the deed upon a day^s notice.
That is, he will not make the act of drawing the deed depend upon, rest
upon, more time than one day.
** He came upon an hour's warning."
That is, this action did not rest, did not depend, upoi> a day, a week, nor a
year, but upon an hour. Actions must depend upon time — hence time be-
comes a basis on which events are placed ; and, as time becomes a basis,
upon, ai>d on may begin clads which contain the cormes that denote
this kind of basis.
Will you refer the clads which begin with upon, or on, in the
following sentences, to their proper dicatories ?
1. " While Peter thought {upon the vision,) the Spirit said
unto him, Behold, three men seek thee."
2. " Remember, sir, that
you are - - - {upon your oath) here."
3. What is said here is
said - ^ - {upon oath*) jg*
1*50 CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
4. "And he puts himself {upon his country) for trial, which
country you are."
5. There should be ano-
ther man ' - {upon the jury,)
6. What judge is now - (upon the bench?)
7. I have my doubts - (upon that subject.)
8. He commenced - {upon the other house) last week. .
9. "Is there not a God
who looks down - {upon us) in mercy?"
10. " Did not men cast re-
proaches - - {upon the Son) of man ?"
11. " Some seed fell - {upon stony places) where they had
not much earth."
12. " And they spit - {upon him,) and took the reed, and
smote him {upon the hand")
13. " Then were there
two thieves crucified ,-
with him, one - {upon either side.)
14. He fell - - - {upon his face.)
15. He is now - - {upon his trial.)
16. - - - - {Upon the same principle^) every
man may violate the laws with impunity.
17. Have you any thing - {upon your books), against me ?
18. " This is the strangest
thing - - - {upon the face) of the earth."
19. This is now - - {upon the docket,) and can not be
removed.
20. The horse has a scar {upon his back.)
21. That ox has a fly - {upon his ear.)
22. " I shall proceed - {upon the ground) that it will be
admitted {upon the other side,) that a lawful tender had
been made of the money which they now demand."
23. " He knows - - {upon ivhich side) |iis bread is but-
tered."
24. The rain beat in - {upon us) with great severity.
25. - - - ,- (" Upon the first day) of the week,
very early in the morning, came Mary Magdalene."
26. "The angel of the
Lord, came, and roll-
ed back the stone
from the door, and sat {upon the stone.")
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS. 1ST
27. He has made a great
improvement - - (upon your lamp.)
28. He has improved - {upon your plcm.)
29. His plan is a great
improvement - - {upon yours.)
30. The fit is now - {upon him.)
illustration of the condiction Within. ( WtVA, and m.)
of the nepoeclads which begin J, Local Ru-dicatory..
v/i(h within. II. Positional E-dicatOry,
1. There is no man - (within these walls.)
The word, with-in, is the name of that place which falls within some boun-
daries. The first part of this word, is with ,- the second, is in. These two
parts are used as distinct words more generally than they are in connection
in the compound word, within, I walked in the fields with my umbrella
over my head.
The first element of this steroclade, with-in, has been formed from
withe. Withe is the name of a small sapling which some farmers use for
bringing, and binding one stake to another in constructing fences. From
being the name of the instrument with which one stake is brought, and
bound to another, withe without the e, has come to denote the act of
bringing one thing to another, as, in the following instances :
1. Make me a coat with buttons upon the cuffs.
2. I walked in the field with my umbrella over my head.
1. That is, with, tie, or 6inc? buttons to the cyffs as the fence-maker wtths
one stake to the other.
2. That is, with, or bring the umbrella over my head as the fence-maker
withs, or brings one stake to the other. (See With.)
The element, with, in the word, within, has the same import which Uie
word, ivith, has in the above instances. The idea of binding, bringing, or
fixing, which with, as an element of within, denotes, is not readily appre-
hended. This, however, arises from the implenary state of the sentence,
which may be seen in the following instances :
1. He came within my reach.
2. He was then within sight.
Rendered plenary :
1. He came with thou him into my reach.
2. He was then with thou him into sight.
1. That is, bring or with thou him into this place jtist as the fence-maker
brings one stake to the other by a withe. But, bring him into what place t
into the place over which my rea/ih, my arm, can extend.
8. That is, bring, or with^oxx him into this place just as the fence-maker
brings, or withs one stake to the other. Bring, or with him into what
place 1 Into that place over which Uie sight of the eye e;3Ctends.
152 CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
2. The pious man finds
happiness - - (within his Bible.)
That is, bring, with, or put the pious man into his Bible. — What then %
why, he is happy. Yes, with, hind, bring, oxfix, the pious man into his
Bible as the fence-maker withs, binds, brings, or Jixes one stake to the other,
and he is happy :
The pious man finds happiness (^with , , in his Bible.)
3. John will return - (within a year.)
That is, with, bring, ox fix his return in the limits of a year.
4. His attempt died - (within itself.)
That is, with, or bring the cfea^A, or the dying oiihe event into the event
itself.
5. " Keep your expenses (within your income.")
ThdX\s, with, bring, ox put your expenses in to_y our income.
(He that can see that ^Hn-come'^ is formed in idea, and in materials too,
from in, and come, can comprehend with-in as formed ixomwith, and in,)
6. " The wound festers (within , , .")
7. " Ills from - - (within , , ) thy reason must
prevent.)
The difference between in, and within.
Upon a mere glance, in, and within seem to be as much alike, or as
nearly synonymous, as on, and upon. A close examination, however, will
show that this is not the case. Generally, on may be substituted for upon,
and upon for on. But in caimot be exchanged for within, and within for
in, in many instances. For instance, in the expression, " there was a family
in the house," within cannot be put for t'p. In conveys the idea that the family
belongs to the house as residents— -ty//Am would convey nothing of this
kind:
1. There was a family in the house.
2. There was a family within the house.
In the first, the idea is that the family belonged to the house. In the
second, the idea is that the family did not belong to the house.
1. Latent heat is in air.
2. Latent heat is within air.
In the first, the condiction is that this heat belongs to the air m one of its
parts. In the second, there is no such idea.
1. He is in my sight, is very different from He is within my sight
2. He is in my reach, is different from He is within my reach.
3. There were many cattle in that field, is quite different from, — There
were many cattle within that field.
In the one case, the idea is that the cattle belonged to the field in which
they were. In the other, the idea is that although they were in the field,
they might not have belonged to the field. .; , , _
CONDJCTION or NEPOECLADS.*^ 155
1. There is guile in every man's heart.
2. There is guile within every man's heart.
In the first, the idea is that guile belongs to the heart, and exerts an influ-
ence over it. In the second, the idea is that although guile is in the heart,
it has no connection with the heart, except this local relation. Within, then,
does not express the full relation which guile bears to the heart — hence it
is not well used.
1. One difference between in and within, seems to be this : In indicates
that whatever occupies the place which in points out, is more, or less perma-
nently located ; as, Some family is in the house.
2. One difference between in and ivithin, is this : In indicates that what-
ever occupies the place which in points out, has some sort of right either
from use, title, or fitness, to that place ; as, We find fishes in water, Birds
in air.
3. One difference between t?z, and within, is this: In indicates various
relations besides that of place, or local, which the thing that occupies the
place which in points out, bears to the thing to which this in place belongs ;
as, There are 100 pages in that book.
Here the idea is, not that the one hundred pages are merely inside of the
book, but that they belong to the book as its component parts. But, if we
substitute within for in, nothing but the naked local idea is conveyed to the
mind concerning these pages : There are 100 pages within the book.
These pages make no part of the book — there is a book independent of
these 100 pages; and within this book these 100 pages are placed.
4. One difference between in, and within, is this: Within,. \n some
instances where the clad thing, is time, brings that time closer to you
so to speak, than in ; as, I can walk a niile within an hour.
This is quite different from, I can walk a mile in an hour. The hour
which is alluded to in the first instance, is a definite hour — it is that which is
tvithed to you — it is the hour which is brought up to, withed up to, the
present moment.
The preceding explanations of the difference between in, and ivithin, are
offered, not as a full illustration of the subject, but as a mere commencement
to such an exposition. This mere beginning, however, is enough for him
who can, and who will, think for himself; and for him who cannot think,
or who, if he can, will not, a mere introduction is better than a full book.
Illustration of the condiction Atween, Atwixt. (two.)
of the nepoeclads which be- I. Numeral Ru-dic.
gin with atween and atwixt. * II. Dual E-dicatort.
1. "Does all go right - ^atween us?")
2. " Is all right - - (atwixt him), and hii Maker?''
* III. Positional Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
3. '* The victim nailed - Tatween two thieves."),
4. ** It came out from - (atwixt the two clefts) oftJie rock,**
The steroclades, atween, and aiwixt, are very rarely found in prose.
154
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
Illustration of the condic-
tion of the nepoeclads which
begin with between, and be-
twixt.
1. There is a difference
2. There is a discord -
Between, Betwixt.
(twain, two.)
I. Numeral Ru-dic.
II. Dual E'Dicatory.
(between the two horses.)
(betwixt the two brothers.)
3. "What is the distinction (between right,) and wrong?^^
4. These two men hold ,
the land - - (between them.)
It is observed by Mr. Webster, and others, that these steroclades may be
used where there are more than two things. Mr. W. gives the following
instance in support of his position.
" Twenty proprietors own a tract of land between them."
In this use of between, there is a perfect disregard to the dual import
which this steroclade derives from its parent word, twain. If we can say .
between tvventy men, what is the diiference between among, and between ?
If there is none ; we may say, among the two men ! among him, and mc !
** Twenty proprietors own a tract of land between them."
" Between them^^ should give place to the clonoclade, together,— ox among
should be put for between.
1. Twenty proprietors own a tract of land together.
2. Twenty men own a tract of land among them. Or, twenty
men own a tract of land among themselves.
That is, the ownership is distributed among the twenty.
Ill, Positional Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
- (between two rocks.)
- fbetwixt the two cities.)
- (between him,) and thee.
- (betwixt the eyes,")
6. He sat
6. The stream ran
7. I stood -
8. " The nose is -
Illustration of the condiction
of the nepoeclads which be-
gin with against.
1. "I am -
2. *' His hand will be -
3. "That is a decree •
4. . . .
5. and
Against.
I. Adversative Ru-dica.
II. Disapprobation E-dicatory.
- (against your pillows.") JEz. xiii.
- (against every man.") Gen. xvi.
II. Repugnance E-dicatory.
- (against law,)
- fagainst public opinion,)
- (against reason itself."")
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS. 155
II. Competition E-dicatory.
6. This horse ran - (against that , .)
7. Harrison ran - - ^against Van Buren.)
8. " The Whigs are - fagainst the Democrats.")
9. There are ten votes - (against nine.)
II. Local E-dicatory.
10. " The ship is - (against the mouth) of the river. *^
11. Aaron lighted the
lamps over - - (against the candlestick.") Num
viii.
12. He leans - - (against the wall.)
II. Unpropitious E-dicatory.
13. This change of mea-
sures is - - - (against us.)
14. The choice of officers
was - - - (against them.)
II. Anticipative E-dicatory.
15. They should get good
wood - -^ - (against winter.)
16. All should lay up
something - - (against time) of need.
17. " Urijahmade it - (against king Ahaz came from Da^
mascus.") 2 Kings xvi.
II. Remedial E-dicatory,
18. Cold water is good - (against a cold.)
19. " Alkalies are good - (against the heart-burn.")
II. Compensation E-dicatory.
" How will you
change horses?" —
I will put mine - (against yours.)
II. Preventive E-dicatory.
" I have endeavoured
to guard - - (against a cold.")
I shall guard - - (against thieves.)
II. Hostile E-dicatory.
80.
21.
22.
23.
24
He raised impious war (against the throne,)
and - - - (against the monarchy) of God.
166 CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
Illustration of the condiction FoT. (from, fore.)
of the nepoeciads which be- I, Advcrsative Ru-dica.
gin with /or. 11. Value E-dicatory.
1. He gave a dollar - (for the knife.)
DocTKiNE. — ^That the learner may understand the condictive character
of the eclads which begin with for, with ease, I have attempted to
illustrate the primary import of for itself. This attempt is made in the
following cut :
Being Fored. Faring.
For, primarily, denoted the act of approaching an individual face-wise,
as is seen in the above cut. The person who fors, or fores, is placed by
the very act oi foring, opposite to him who is fored, or approached. And,
from the fact that for was primarily the name of the act out of which the
adversative position grew, fore, abridged io for, has come to be used where
one thing is put opposite to another in value. Hence some of the agno-
meclads which begin with jV, convey the idea that the nepoeclad thing
is placed agamst the other thing in value ; as, '* Buy us, and our land for
bread. — Gen. xlviii. 19.
The bread is placed against us, and our land, much in the same way as
he who fors, is placed opposite to him who is fored. The difference between
the two cases is that, in one the opposition lies in place ,- and in the other,
it lies in value. Or, in one, the opposition is produced by bringing one per-
son against another in position ,- and in the other, it is produced by putting
one thing against another in value.
2. (*' For my life) I cannot understand
the man."
That is, though I should place my life against this knowledge, even with
this high price, I could not get it..
3. I will give my horse - (for yours.)
That is, I will put my horse against yours in value. Or, I will set the
value of mine against the value of yours.
4. " He gave cattle - (for horses.")
5. *' They ^ave him ten
stripes - - (for each offence.")
CONDICtlON OF NEPOECLADS. 157
DocTRiTfE. — The penal code has fixed a certain penal value to each crime
much in the same way in which the business system has fixed a particular
value to each article which is purchased, or exchanged in the market. Hence
punishments are spoken of as being set off against crime. Or punishment
is spoken of as being given in exchange for crime, or against crime. And
although from a slight view this may seem anomalous ; yet from a close
examination, no eccentricity will be found in it. To him who is ignorant
of the true import of for, the expression, " Pennsylvania gives severe punish-
ments/or crime," conveys the idea that Pennsylvania inflicts punishment
to procure crime — and, that she is bent on pronrnoting, instead of preventing
a violation of her laws ! But to him who understands for as meaning
against, this expression is just, and beautiful. The nepoeclads in the
following sentences, have the same condigtive import :
1. Pennsylvania gave D. imprisonmentybr his crimes.
2. Johnson gave D. cash^or his corn.
In both, the idea is that, one thing is set off against another : in the first,
the imprisonment is put against the crime ; in the second, the idea is, that the
cash is put against the com. It is in both cases a matter of exchange :
Pennsylvania had received the crimes of D. and she gave him imprisonment
in exchange. Johnson received the com of D. and he gave him cash in
exchange.
6. "And if any mischief
follow, then thou
shalt give life - - (for life,)
7. eye
8. tooth
9. hand
10. foot - - - (forfoot."^ JSJa?. xxi.
11. *'To give his
ransom - - - (for many.") Matt. xx.
That is, to set his life off in the character of an equivalent, against the
many who were lost in the fall of Adam.
12.. " Or what shall a man
give in exchange - (for his own soul ?") Mark viii.
II. Rksistive E-dicatory.
18. This root is good - (for a cough.)
That is, this root is good to oppose, or stbdue a cough. As he whofors
another, is opposed to him in place, so is this root opposed to a cough in
action.
14. <' Alkalies are good - (for the heart-burn.")
That is, they are good to resist the heart-burn.
158 CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
15. Every man should
provide clothing - (for winter.)
That is, clothing to resist the cold of winter.
This, 15, may seem to many to fall under the Adapted-to E-bi-
CATOBT. Upon this pointy I shall make a few reflections under this
dicat&ry.
II. Prevention E-dicatory.
16. " She wrapped him
close - - - (for , catching) cold." — Shak.
That is, she wrapped him close to prevent the catching of a cold.
17. "And, - - - (for the time shall not seem te-
dious.") — Shak.
That is, as a prevention against the time's seeming tedious, &c. This
application is obsolete.
II. Obstacle Kdicatoby.
18. " John will go where
he pleases - - (for all) me," - ^
That is, John will go where he pleases, even when all which I can do
stands against his act in the character of an obstacle. The plenary state
will do the reader no harm :
fJohn will go where] (he pleases) (for all , , )
(, , » ' ) ( ' "^^0
John will go where he pleases (tor all the opposition) [which can be
made) {hy me.)
19. " Joseph Boston may
be in Philadelphia, - (for any thing) that I know."
That is, nothing which I know can be put against this fact to prevent, to
disprove it.
20. The roads are bad,
indeed, but - - [for b[\) that I shall go.
But I shall go even against this obstacle. Plenary : But I shall go (for,
against all the impediment) (which that fact can produce.)
II. Substitution E-picatory.
21. John acts - - (forme.)
That is, John is set off against me, as a substitute for me.
22. "He gave up the law (for divinity.")
That is, he substituted one profession for the other.
23. He translated the
poem line - - (for line.)
That is, he set off a line of English, for instance, as a substitute, against,
or for, a line of Latin.
CONDICTION OF NEPOEGLADS. 159
■f II With Referexce-to fi-DicAToax.
24. It was a great sura - - (for John) to give.
'J'hat is, when this amount is placed off against John, much as he
who fors, is against him that is fored, it is great. By the side of John
this sum is large — but by the side oi Stephen this sum is small.
25. " It was young counsel - (for these persons,)
26. and violent counsel - - (for the matters.")
* 11. With Refekebtce-to E-dicatort.
1. I have many apprehen-
sions - - - (for him.)
2. I have no apprehensions - (for myself.)
DocTRiTTE. — From being the name of the act of approaching face-
wise, /or has come to convey an allusion, in certain cases, to an ap-
proach without any regard to the manner ; as, I have many appre-
hensions far him; but I have no apprehension for myself.
That is, when I for, or approach him, I have many apprehensions,
but when I for myseilf, I have no apprehensions. Hence comes the
idea expressed in the distinctive title, " With Reference-to."
3. Thus much - - - (for this trait) in the character
oi for.
That is, all the above note fipproaches, or fors this trait, the witk
reference to trait.
4. " Thus much - - - (for the progress) of the de-
luge.''^
II. In the ChAKACTER-OF Ru-DICATORr.
5. I took him - " - - (for a good man.)
6. They were taken - - (for brothers.)
7. " I hear - - - - (for certain,) and do speak the
truth.''— Skak,
8. " He quivered with his
feet, and lay - - (for dead.") — Dryden.
9. We took you - - - (for the President.)
10. " Let her go - - - (for an ungrateful woman.")
11. "I took this note - - (for the messenger) of love.''
DocTEiBTE. — To place for at the beginning of nepoeclads that
describe the character in which the thing mentioned in the superior
mono, is taken, is not inconsistent with the primary import of this
nepoeclide. Primarily, it was the province of for to denote the
w
160 CONDICTION OP NEPOECLAlilr-
vidual face-wise. From this particularity in the character of the approach-
ing act, for has come to convey an allusion to character. Hence for has
come to be the first word in the dads which mention the exact cha-
racter in which a person, or a thing is taken ; as, I took this note for good
money.
That is, I took it in the character of good money. Or good money \s the
character in which I took the note.
Had the primary import of for been the act of approaching an indivi-
dual in various characters, or ways — or had this word been applied to the
act of approaching without any particular manner, or character of action,
there is no probability thatthisrnepoeclidewould now be employed to con-
vey an allusion to the character in which a thing is taken by the mind.
::j:II. Destination E-dicatorv.
12. " We sailed from Boston - - (for Texas.")
13. " We sailed from Peru - - ^for China.")
14*. " We sailed directly - - - (for Genoa.")
Doctrine.' — The word, China, is the name of a city, a place. This
word without for conveys no idea at all of a place of destination. The
abdictive import of the word, Chinas is quite different from the condictive
import of "for ChinaJ' " China'* signifies a city, but "/or China," as used
above, signifies a place of destination.
The word, for, primarily, was the name of an act which always had a
destination; for he who was forcing, approaching another face-wise, was
bound to a certain port, so to speak : the other person became a sort of place
of destination : the foring person was constantly making for, ot forwards to
the other individual. Besides, the formality of the act of foring, is indi-
cative of some fixed purpose. The act was done face-wise — face toward
face, as is seen in the cut.
This formal act would naturally raise in the mind of him who was fored,
the idea of a fixed purpose in him who was foring. The act of foring, then,
was connected with a particular place, a special port, and with a fixed pur-
pose. And, as these are two things which constitute a destination, with
what marked propriety is for employed to convey the notion of destination ?
Design, and place are the elements of destination.
^Wy' %ll- CONDUCIVE-TO E-DICATORY.
15. It would be - - - - (for his health) to exer-
cise.
16. To be just is - - - - (for the general good.)
17. To withdraw would be - - (for his honour.)
18. It would be - - - - (for his comfort) to re-
tire.
Doctrine. — Originally, /or in the form of fore, signified the act of
approaching an individual, not in the direction of his side, nor in the direc-
tion of his back, but in liie direction of his face. And, as the face is a
token of favour, of good, for has come to be used where the clad
thing is to receive some good from the act, or measure, mentioned, either
before, or after the clad ; as. To tell the truth is /or his credit.
■"U%-
m
p.' :"■■"
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS. 161
^ . That is, to tell the truth is for the good of his credit Or, the telling of
""•'^the truth will not be against, but va. favour of his credit.
1'hat the face is employed as an emblem of good, of favour^ is obvious
from the following instances ;
1. *' Hide not thy /ace from thy servant because he is in
great trouble."
2. " Wilt thou for ever cast us off,
And still neglect our cries ?
Why should we seem like men abhorred,
Or banished from thy/«ce.^" (from \hy favour^
It was the /ace that conducted him who fored, to him who was fored. The
act oiforingy then, had much to do with the/zee ,• and the/ace has much to do
with \he favour, good — much to do with the idea oi promoting the object for
which one approaches, or fors another. For if I approach an individual foraid,
and he turns his /tee from me, the conclusion must be that the attempt at pro-
curing aid from him, will be fruitless. The moment his face is turned from
me, the idea is indicated that my approaching him for favour, will not be
conducive to the object for which I approached him. The face, too, has
much to do in giving, and denying favour by its clear expressions either for,
or against the appeal. The face, however, is never used as an emblem of
ill, of negation — it is indicative of good, of favour, in all instances where
it is employed. And, as the act of foring leads to this emblem of goody
so the word, for, has come to be used as the sign that the act, or measure,
mentioned in connection with the agnomeclad thing, will lead to the ^ooc?,
, to the favour, of this thmg ; as, it is for the cause of general education to
establish public schools.
Foring leads a person to the /ace — the /ace is a prominent token, or em-
blem of favour, of ^oot^^^hence for has come to convey the idea of one
thing's conducing to the good of another.
II. Negation E-dicatory.
19. "He is able to walk - - - (for aught) Ihnoioy
That is, nothing which I know is a negation of the idea that he can walk.
'20. (For aught) 25 ^enera%
^ known, John Boston is honest.
5 21. " The President is in the city - (for aught) is known.^*
II. Benefit E-dicatory.
22. I write - - - - - (for Mr. Adams.)
Docthisi. — The face is often alluded to in the scripture, as a token of
favour. And, as for was the name of the act of approaching, which is
closely connected with the /ace of each person, for, like the face itself, has
come to convey an idea of favour. From conveying an allusion U) favour
it has naturally come to make an allusion to benefit. It was done /or me.
That is, for my benefit. j^^,
162
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
If you will not go for him, you will certainly go for your-
self'
That is, if you will not go for his benefit, you will certainly go for the
benefit of yourself,
23. He works - - - - (for his brother.)
24. " For he loveth our nation ; and he
hath built a synagogue
25. Will you carry this note -
26. " I will go to Boston
lars:'
(for us.")
[for me ?)
(for you) for ten doU
27
*II. In Fatour-op E-dicatory.
III. Support Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
- (for this course) ©/"con-
- (for this distinction)
29.
30.
Is there a good reason
duct?
Is there a good. cause
among men?
" But this argument does not make (for the defendant.'*)
" There is a natural, immutable,
and eternal reason - - (for that , ) which we
call virtue^'''' and against that which tve call vice.
Doctrine. — The ideais that the reason here mentionedj^br*, approaches^
comes up to virtue, much as one person was said to for another. And the
reason /ws virtue, presses up to virtue, to support virtue — hence the idea of
tn favour of.
The act of faring from its very nature placed face opposite to face. Il
was an act the manner of which was controlled entirely by faces. Hence
for, the very name of this act, has come to be used as the face itself is fre-
quently used, as a sign of favour. " Hide not thy face from thy servant
because he is in great trouble."
Faring is a face action — the face is a token of favour — hence the namo
of this /ace act, has come to be employed much as the face itself.
* III. Partial Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
31. I am -
32. He was -
vernment.)
33. Is he
narchy ?
34. "Aristotle is - - -
35. In this country, every man is
36. and all
- (for a free trade.)
- (for a republican go-
- (for a limited mo-
- /for poetical justice.")
- (for himself,)
- (for the government.)
i
COBTDICTION OP NiE?OECLADS. 163
ij:. f . * II. Purpose E-dicatory.
* III. Benefit Ex-e-dic-a-tory,
37. Was this instrument made - - (for James?)
38. Were men born - - - (for kings,)
39. as beasts are - - - - (for men ?)
DocTHiNE. — The idea of purpose is quite naturally derived from the ac
of foring. The act itself b indicative of purpose.
t III. Procurative Ex-e-dic-a-tory
40. I went (for my book.)
41. He is ever waiting - - - (for some expected
good.)
42. " I am looking - - - - (for my brother) "every
day:'
43. I apply to this court - - - (for redress,)
44. and ------ (for protection.)
45. He was sent to me - - - (for money.)
46. " He wrote - - - - (for money.")
47. Men generally write - - - (for fame.)
48. I am ready - - - - (for you.)
49. I have prepared - , - (for you.)
50. He is now in search - - - (for arguments.)
51. Let him recur to antiquity - - (for examples.)
ijiIII. Use-of Ex^e-dic-a-tory.
62. Hats are made - - - - (for the head.)
53. This coat is - - - - (for John Boston.)
54. This glass is - - - - (for that room.)
55. This knife is good - - - (for pens.)
56. That knife is good - - - (for nothing.l
57. The osier is good - - - (for twigs,)
58. and the poplar - - - - (for the mill.)
59. ** It is not ----- (for me) to control the
sea:'
That is, this use of me, so to speak, is not the purpose for which I was
intended.
II. Lot E-dicatory.
60. It was reserved - - - - (for America) to leaa
the world to democracy.
That is, it was the part, fate, or division, which fell to America as her let
61. It was not - - - - (for Adam) to with-
stand the temptation of the forbidden tree.
164 CONDIGTION OP NEPOECLADS.
62. It was - - - - - (for Christ) to redeem
the lost race.
63. It is not (for me) to dictate to
you, gentlemen.
64. It is not - - - - - (for him) to control the
seas,
II. Auxiliary E-dicatory.
65. *' Moral consideration can no way
move the sensible appetite, was
it not (for the will.")
That is, did not the will for, or come up to the aid of moral considera-
tion, moral consideration could not move the sensible appetite.
In some instances, for exerts its influence over the nepoeclad thing ;
an4 in others, over the trone or the ^o-ec/a<^ thing :
1. Henry cried out for anguish.
2. He gave a dollar for the book.
In the first, ybr renders the anguish the cause of the crying out. In the
second, for exerts no influence over the book, the clad thing, but
exhausts its influence upon the dollar, a trone thing, in causing it to
stand against the book in value.
In the instance, "for the will," for exerts its powers upon the Wi 11 in
bringing it up to the aid of the will in moving the sensible appetite. The
will fors the appetite to bestow a help, a good, a favour, upon it in aiding
it in the work of moving the appetite.
66. He could not pay his debts, was
it not - - - - (for his friends.)
That is, he could not pay his debts did not his friends /or him, and favoui
him with their aid.
67. I should go was it not - - (for my brothers.)
That is, was it not that my brothers press up to me, or for me with their
aid in helping me not to go. (This mono, however, except in form,
belongs to the prevestiok Edicatort.)
II. Causative dicatory.
68. "He cried out - - - - (for anguish.")
69. He cannot pay - - . - - (for the want) of
means.
70. (" For this reason) I
cannot believe the report."
71. " With fiery eyes sparkling - (for very wrath.")
72. " That which we - - - (for our unworthiness,)
are afraid
73. to crave, our prayer is that Grod - (for the worthiness) of
his Son would vouchsafe to grant."
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS. 165
74. The inhabitants suffered - - (fof provisions,)
75. and - (for wood.)
Doctrine. — The act of faring seems well calculated to raise the idea
of a cause. The act is a formal one : face against face, as in the cut.
This formal act would hardly be performed without some certain cause to
produce it. Nor is it at all likely that the person fored, could witness this
formal approach without some mental inquiry into the cause of the event.
From having been the name, the sign, of an act which is replete with cause,
for has come to begin some nepoeclads which are founded upon the
cause ; as, " The man was hanged fur the crhne of murder," John was
afraid fur to return.
76. He was afraid - - - - (for to meet his oppo-
nent.)
" To meet his opponent," is the cause of the fear, and is taken as a cor
mified gemimono.
II. Passing-through E-dicatory.
77. " Henry travelled . - - (for three hours) to-
gethery
78. They hold their offices - - (for life.)
79. " They rode - - - - (for miles together.")
80. His nod has decided all causes
in Sicily - - - - (for these three years.)
Doctrine. — The im^port of the distinctive word which is com-
pounded of passing, and through, is aptly derived from the action
of which for, or fore, was primarily the name, or sign. To for,
was to pass from the place of departure through all that space
which fell between the foring, and the fored person. Hence for
has come to mean passing through the entire time, or the whole
space in distance, mentioned in the nepoeclad. For denoted
passing ; nay more, it signified passing through. To for an indi-
vidual, was to pass through all the space which lay between him
who was to for, and him who was to be fored. For demanded
the performance of the entire, the who.le act.
Remark. — For is the only nepoeclide which can be conjected to
a demimono. And where it is so conjected, the whole is taken
as one mono: and the demimono part is the corm to which /or is
conjected ; as. He went to Boston for to see his friends.
In such instances, the whole mono is a nepoeclad, having is
clear a condictive character as any other mono which begins with
for. Generally, however, this kind of nepoeclad is of the Pur-
pose Edicatort, and Procurative Exedicatory ,- as, "What went
ye out for to see. P"
2. For is often a nepoecled; as, He was called for.
166 CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
Class the following nepoeclads which begin with/or.
1. " It is for us to show that our religion, is the religion of
theBible."
2. " There are tearsybr his love, joy for his fortune, honour
for his valour, and death /or his ambitionJ'^
3. "As I slew my best lover for the good of Rome, 1
reserve the same dagger for myself whenever Rome
demands my death."
i. .*' Now, for so many glorious actions done,
For peace at home, and/br the public wealth,
I mean to crown a bowl /or Csesar^s health,^^
h. *' He digged a place /or the wine-vat.''''
6. "A motion was made (for an order) (for a writ,) (for
the election) of a burgess (for to serve , , ^ in parliament
(for the borough) of Old Sarum."
7. Will you work (for me) (for sixdays) (for two dollars)
(for each day ?)
8. I have a hat (for each man.)
Illustration of the condic- Qf. Source, — {from, off.)
tionofthe nepoeclads which I. SoUFCitive Ru-dica.
begin with of. II Material E-dicatory.
1. " This cloth is made - - - (of good wool.")
DocTRiifE. — Of denotes that the following thing
is the source "of the preceding one. It is thought to
be a contraction of off, with which in one respect it
is nearly synonymous. " The fruit of the vine."
That is, the fruit which has sprung off from the
vine. The word, of, seems not only to inherit the
significant character of its parent, off but to possess
also a sourciiive one for which it is indebted not to off,
but to the power of custom. The truth is that men
saw the convenience of having a word in our language, which would ex-
press, not onlj^ the idea of one thing coming from another thing, but that it
comes from the other thing as its source. Off denotes the idea of depart-
ure, but not that of source — and to furnish this word, they have dropped
one /in off, which makes of. And to give (/its import, they have retained
the import of off, and added that of source. The figure which has been
selected to represent this word (o/) is the sun, the great source of light,
heat, &c. &c.
Of imports source — and as the sun is the source of so much, the sun ia
presented as the general meaning of of.
This cloth is made of good wool.
CONDIGTION OP NEPOECLADS. 167
Ofy here means source, and is used to show that the wool, called good, is
the source o^from which the cloth sprung. This cloth is made, taken off
from good wool. Now, as light, and heat, spring off from the sun, so does
the cloth spring off from the wool. Attend to the following remark :
As the sun is the source of light, and heat, so is the thing, mentioned
AFTER of, the source of something mentioned before of.
2. This hat is made - - - (of fine fur.)
3. This is a man - - - - (of genius.)
That is, his mind has been derived principally from genius. Or, genius
is the source whence his mind, or his powers of mind, have been formed,
constructed, made. The word, man, as here used, does not include the
person, the body, of the individual — it includes the mind only. It is an
instance in which the luhole is put for a part. It is a synecdoche — a com-
mon figure in which a part only may be put for the whole, or the tvJiole
for a part.
It is held by the old school grammarians, that the leading idea of this
mono, is that of possession. From a slight examination, this notion seems
plausible enough.
" This is a man of genius."
Well, say they, if he is a man of genius, he must possess genius. This
mode of reasoning, however, would lead to very absurd results ; for every
thing which is formed out of materials, must be in possession of the mate-
rials from which it is made. Hence the mono, " of leather," in the follow-
ing period, is possessive in its condiction :
"These shoes are made of leather."
That the shoes which are made from leather, possess leather, cannot be
questioned for one moment. But it may well be questioned at all times,
whether the notion of possession, is the expressed idea in the mono which
mentions the material ftom which the thing is made, is derived, by the
maker.
"The shoe is made o/* /eaf/ier."
The expressed idea is that the leather is the material put 'of which the
shoe is derived. The inferred idea is that the shoe possesses the leather.
This is a natural result — who does not know that that shoe which is con-
structed out of leather, has leather in, and about it ? The kind of possession,
however, which is here inferred by the mind, is not legitimate possession.
To render the possession legitimate, the shoe should be formed, and exist
independent of the leather which, the old school grammarians say, the shoe
possesses. Legitimate possession of leather by a shoe, does not require
that the shoe should be formed out of leather ; it may be made of cloth, of
silk, of paper. The shoe must be made before it can begin to possess
leather, or any other thing. Hence it may be made of cloth, and
possess leather, just as quickly, just as soon, as it would was it con-
structed from leather. If the shoe is made of cloth, it will pos-
sess leather as soon as leather is put into its possession ; and, if
it is made of leather it will not possess leather till leather is put
into its possession. A thing cannot be said to possess that of
168 CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
which it is made I To give a sl\de iegitimate possession of leather,
a piece of leather must, in some way or other, be placed within
the shoe. This, however, cannot be done till the shoe exists —
, hence a paper shoe may possess leaf her as well as a leather shoe !
Again, does it seem likely that the word, of, has been formed from q^to
xnAtk possession ? Has it ever been known that off, the parent of of, con-
veys any allusion to possession ? The truth is that the mind, in matters
of words, not unfrequently performs a sort of legerdemain operation upon
itself: from the ease with which it comprehends the inferred idea, it adopts
the inferred one for the expressed. The mind generally cheats itself in
this way in instances in which the inferred idea is not inconsistent with the
general notion of the sentence ; and the expressed one is more difficult to
apprehend. To prevent this fraud of the mind upon itself, the reader should
give his sole attention to the expressed idea. It is not difficult to see in
what way the old school syntaxists have come to the conclusion that the
nepoeclad in the following poetrone has a. possessive import hy expres-
sion:
*' This is a man of genius^
They have unwittingly neglected the expressed idea, because no ahso-
lute harm could result to the general idea, from substituting the inferred
one for the expressed one. The expressed idea is that genius is the source^
so far as the material constitutes the source, of the mind. Not that the
minid is all genius, but that more of this rare material, of this scarce ingre-
dient, has been used than is generally employed in forming minds. Is the
shoe that is said to be mside of leather, all leather] Certainly not— it is
made up of thread, pegs, cloth, and leather. The main material, however,
is leather — hence we say the ^hoe is made of leather ,• or, the shoe is a
leather shoe. .
Before of had been formed, men must have felt the necessity of having a
word with which to begin those nepoeclads that mention the material out of
which the thing, named in the trone, and in the poeclad, is made.
In providing such a word, they fell upon off as the material out of which
to form it. They must have selected off as the material for of, for two rea-
sons. First, q^ required but little alteration to render it suitable inform —
the omission of one /. But secondly, and mainly, they selected off from
which, to form such a word, because off had a meaning which they desired
the new word to have. And of, like off, in all instances, denotes the idea
of springing from, coming from. To this idea of from, men conjoined that
of source ,• hence of was made such a word as men saw was necessary in
the expression of thoughts concerning that source from which things are
formed, or derived. Of, then, signifies that the thing mentioned in the
clad which of begins, is in some way, in some sense, or other, the
source of the thing mentioned in the superior mono,
4. " He is a man - - - - (of decayed fortune.")
That is, he is a man, so far aishis condition is concerned, of a. new crea-
tion. From whose hands has lie now falUen 1 From those of a decayed
fortune. In condition, he is a new creature — and, with propriety may it
be said, that he is the son, the offspring, of a decayed fortune.
He is a man whose condition is that of a decayed fortune.
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS. X69
That is, ^yhose condition is that condition which has proceeded from a
decayed fortune ; or which has been formed out of a decayed fortune somei-
what as a shoe is formed out of leather. In other words, the decayed fortune
is the material out of which the condition is formed, much in the same way
in which the leather is the material out of which the shoe is formed. The
expression is a figure in which the man himself is put for his condition.
It is what the old school men call a metonymy ; and what the new deno-
minate, a gnomologue.
A metonymy is a figure which mentions one thing
with a view to point out another with which it has an index relailon. The
man is mentioned as an index to his condition. " He is a man of decayed
fortune."
That is, he is a man whose condition is one of decayed fortune. Who
cannot see this? The writer is not speaking of the man, but of the man's
condition — and he informs us that his condition is that which is made up
of a decayed fortune.
- 5. " John Brown is a man - - (of, straw.")
If the old school men are correct, the idea here is that John Brown pos^
sesses straw ! But, if the new are correct, the idea is that he is made of
materials which are about as efficient in the production of a man, as is the
straw of which human scarecrows, sometimes placed in fields of corn, are
constructed by farmers. To show that a shoe is not good, we may show
the materials of which it is made ; so to indicate that a man is not efficient,
we may show the materials of which he has been made : he is a man of
straw.
Then again, to indicate that a man is a man, we may mention the mate-
rials out of which he is formed : he is a man of genius, and judgment. That
is, a man whose mind has been constructed out of the very best materials.
6. "He is a man - - - - (of an unblemished
character.")
This, too, is metonymy : the man is mentioned in order to arrive at
his reputation. He is a man of an unblemished character. That is, he
is a man whose character is formed out of an unblemished character.
Every man's character is not made out of such good stuff.
7. " The wickedness - - - (of the human heart)
is obvious."
Here, by the human heart, is meant the leading passion of the human
heart. Hence the idea is that wickedness is the material of which this
passion is made, or formed.
8. " They are - - - - (of this opinion.")
TTiey, here, means thdr doctrine, their belief their sentiment. Hence
the idea ia that this opinion is the material out of which their sentiment is
formed.
9. " If he found any - is * - (of that way.")
170 CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
That is, if he found any person whose religious doctrine was made, or
formed, out of that way. That is, out of that way, Or system, which Jesus
Christ revealed to man.
10. He has a knowledge - - (of man.)
That is, man is the material frftm which this knowledge is formed. But
the word, man, as here used, does not mean the human race — it means the
nature of this race. Hence the true idea may be better seen from the fol-
lowing :
He has a knowledge of the nature of man.
That is, the nature of man is the material from which the knowledge in
question is derived. Some how or other, the nature is worked up into ideas ;
and these are knowledge. But is the nature worked up into ideas as leather
is worked up into shoes 1 O, no ! — nor is this particular method of work-
ing the nature up into ideas, necessary to render the nature a material.
The mind, some how, or other, extracts, draws, the nature of man from man,
into itself, and constructs, by its own operation upon this nature, such ideas
out of it, as are denominated knowledge. Say for instance, that one of the
ideas which are denominated a knowledge of the nature of man, is that the
human heart is prone to evil. Now th.\& proneness must be the very mate-
rial from which this idea is formed. \, '
11. "The foundations were made - (of precious stones.")
12. *' The first foundation was - (of jasper.")
13. " The second , was - (of sapphire.")
14. " Does he faithfully discharge the
duties - - - - - (of his office ?")
His entire office is cut up into parts, and thus made into different duties.
Each part is the material from which a distinct duty is formed.
15. "The state - - - - (of moral purity) is a
happy condition.'*^
That is, the state, the condition, which is made from the material, called
moral purity, is a happy state.
16. " This lad goes by the name , - (of John.")
That is, he goes by that name which is made out of the material, John.
Or, the word, John, is the material out of which the name by which this
lad goes, is made.
17. A binominal root is composed - (of two parts.)
18. "They platted a crown - - (of thorns.")
19. I saw a sea - - - - (of glass.)
20. " They made clay - - - (of the spittle.")
21. "Ye are - - -, - - (of this world.")
That is, your leading character is sl composition of worldly materials.
22. He has a singular kind - - (of nose.)
A kind is a class, made up of individuals, having the same charactenstics.
' CONDICTION OP NEPOEGLADS. 171
Hence these individuals are the source of the kind — the source, inasmuch
as they are the materials out of which the kind is made, or formed.
23. Give me a loaf- - - - (of bread.)
That is, a loaf which is made out of the material that is called bread.
24. James got a loaf - - - (of sugar.)
This loaf it seems is made, riot out of bread, but out of sugar.
25. Give me a pound - - - (of tea.)
Give me a pound — but from what shall this pound be derived ? What
material shall be used in forming, in making, this pound ] tea. The
pound, then, shall be made out of tea.
26. " I saw the body - - - (of Samuel Jones.")
From what material was this body made, which I saw 1 from the human
matter, called Samuel Jones. Samuel Jones, then, is the source of this body,
by being the material of which the body was formed, or made.
27. *' I live in the city - - - (of Philadelphia.")
" Live in what city ]" I will answer your question by telling you the mor
terial out of which the city is made : I live in the city of Philadelphia.
That is, the city in which I live is that city which springs off from, or out
of, that place which is called Philadelphia.
28. Henry lives in a house - - (of stone.)
Lives in what house 1 Let this question be answered by naming the
materials of which the house is constructed. " Henry lives in a house of
stoner
29. "Language is the principal vehicle (of thought.")
GooLD Brown's Grammar.
The impropriety with which this sentence is marred by an improper use
of of, has lead to its introduction in this place. It has been said that in
matters of words, the mind not unfrequently cheats itself by unwittingly
substituting the inferred meaning of a sentence, for the expressed one. This
instance by Mr. Goold Brown, is well calculated to sustain this position.
Men, in general, upon reading this sentence, would disregard the expressed
idea of it, and, from the nature of the subject* fix upon an inferred one.
The inferred idea is that language is a vehicle which ^is employed for the
purpose of communicating thoughts. The expressed idea, however, is
that language is a vehicle which is made out of thought, much as a cartt
or any other vehicle is made out of wood, and iron.
1. "Language is a reMcZe q/'f/ww^g'^^"
2. A river is a - stream of fresh water, &c.
Does the mono, of fresh water, indicate the purpose of the stream ? O,
no — this mono tells of what the stream is made : a river is a stream oi fresh
water. A river is a stream — a stream of what 1 That is, what matter is
it of which thb stream is formed 1 Is the stream made ot brandy ? No.
172 CONDICTION OF NEPOECitADS^
Is it made of cider ? Ko. Is it made of wine ? No. Is it made of liquid
metal? No. The stream is made of fresh water.
1. *' Language is a vehicle of thought.'^
2. A river is a stream of fresh water, &c.
Will the reader examine these two gnomods in juxtaposition ?
A stream is something which must be made out of some material — hence,
" of fresh water" is subjoined, to show the material of which this stream
is made.
A vehicle, too, is a thing which must be made out of some material —
and, as "o/ thought" is subjoined to vehicle, in the same way in which
*' of fresh water" is subjoined to stream, is it not as obvious that the
thought is presented as the material out of which the vehicle is constructed,
as it is that the fresh water is presented as the matter, or material from
which the stream is formed i
This is iliid first sentence in the preface of Mr. Goold Brown's compila-
tion on English grammar, which he calls "His Finished Labouus."
But Ihis is not the only instance of an author's having ^msZterf his labours
before his task of qualification had been half completed ! Of is rarely
used in that clad which is founded upon a purpose. In speaking
of the purpose of a building, one would hardly say, A house of corn t He,
who had not been led astray by Mr. G. B.'s Grammar, would say, A house
for corn. Nor would any one, not taught by Mr. G. B.'s " Finished La-
bours," be Hkely to use of in speaking of the purpose of an instrument;
as. This is a knife of carving ! He would probably say. This is a knife
for carving — Or, this is a carving\ni^e. Now, language, like a knife, is
an instrument, and, in speaking of it in reference to its use, for must begin
the clad ; as, Language is a vehicle for the communication of
thoughts.
But in speaking of this instrument in reference to the materials of
which it is made, of must begin the clad ; as. Language is a vehicle
of articulate sounds, and alphabetic characters. Or, language is a vehicle
of signs.
30. Where did he get this amount - (of cash ?) ",;
By being the material out of which the amount is made, the cash is the
source of the amount. An amount derived, made from, what 1 Is the
amount formed, derived, from wood, from hai/, from butter, from paper, or
from money ? from money. An amount, a number, a company, a family,
&c. are things which must be made from some kind of materials — and,
when we speak of these things in reference to the materials of which they
are formed, the clad begins with of. Of is the great, the distin-
guished, source-alluding steroclade in the English phrenod. The amount^
the nuinher, the family, is the thing, made, is the piece of mechanism,
formed ; and the clad which follows, is employed to mention the
material, used in the formation of this thing.
31. There is a number - - - (of men) Afire.
32. There was a family - - - (of five persons.)
33. There was a convention - - (of Pennsylvanians.)
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLAPS. 173
34. There is a society - - - (of ladies.)
35. Should there not be a convention - (of nations ?)
36. There was an assemblage - - (of boys) in the street.
37. There is a large collection - - (of water) here.
38. Three individuals - - - (of the jury) are owf.
39. Four , - - - - (of the company) re-
turned.
That is, four individuals of the company returned. From what did
these four individuals spring 1 They sprang off from this company. The
company, then, is spoken of in the light of a material from which these
four individuals have been derived. The side of leather is that from which
the shoe springs — the side of leather affords, gives, yields, the shoe ; and the
entire company affords, gives, in the capacity of a material, these four indi-
viduals. But in what sense does the company afford them, give them 1
Does the company create them, form their bodies, and souls 1 O, no — in
the act of the creation of their bodies, and souls, these four individuals were
given to themselves. They, however, for some purpose, or other, had
united themselves with others in the formation of a company, an artificial
being, compounded of several entire natural beings. These four natural
beings, therefore, withdrew in a certain sense from the community, and
became mere parts of an artificial being which became a member of the
community from which the four individuals, and all the others in the com-
pany, had withdrawn in the creation of this company. These four indi-
viduals, while members of this company, were to the company, what the
fingers, the arms, or the ears of a human being, are to himself. They were
not wJwle beings — as members of the company, they were not individuals,
but mere parts of the artificial frame-work of this compound being. But
on leaving the company, these mere parts of the artificial being, became
entire natural beings. Here, then, is a new creation — four of the boneSf
so to speak, of the artificial being, were converted into entire natural beings
These four bones, these four simples, in this point of view, became the mor
terials from which the four entire beings were formed.
40. A company - - - - (of thirty individuals)
was formed.
A company was formed. Out of what 1 out of thirty individuals.
41. A company - - - - (of thirty individuals)
42. - (of Philadelphia,) was
sent.
From what materials was this company formed 1 from thirty individuals.
And from what materials were these individuals formed ? from Philadel-
phia. What, from ihe place, called Philadelphia? O," no— but from the
people who reside in this place. The shoe is taken out of the side of the
leather ; the nail, out of the bar of iron ; the coat, out of the roll of cloth — and
this company, out of thirty persons ; and the thirty persons are taken out,
made out, of the Philadelphians. Who does not hear the remarks, that our
legislature is composed of had materials, that our congress is made of the
174 CONDICTION OP NEP0ECLAD9.
Wong stuff; that this, or that jury is formed of mixed materials? Bat
It may be replied that these qxg figures. Admitted — so too are the instances
on which I am commenting, figures — they are figures, however, which have
sprung out of the close analogy between the material, employed in the
formation of a shoe, a nail, a house, a table, &c., and those lyings, or indi-
viduals of which, or from whom, a company, a society, a number, &c. are
made. Thirty individuals, then, are presented in a figure of speech, as the
materials out of which a company is formed. And the Philadelphians too,
are presented in a figure of speech, in the character of the materials out
Jive,
67. " He compared pleasure - - (with pain.")
Although jo/easure, and^ain, are by no means analogous in themselves,
they may be similar in their results upon whatever they exert an influence :
hence, although, as emotions, they cannot be compared, yet as causes, pro-
ducing effects, they may be compared. For instance, pleasure may produce,
a want of appetite, so also may pain.
68. '* This cloth compares well - (with that cloth.")
69. Let us compare his arguments - (with reason.)
That is, let us see how far the arguments reciprocate the attributes of
reason with reason, and how far reason reciprocates itself with his argu-
ments. In short, wherever any two, or more things are brought together
either actually or mentally, with a view to ascertain their agreement, or
their disagreement, in any particular, or particulars, with should be used ;
as. Let us compare hla4:k with white.
Whether there is any agreement, or not — with should be used where the
speaker intends to speak of the things as having an agreement. But where
a comparison is made without any desire, or intimation to ascertain the par-
ticulars in which the things reciprocate, or to ascertain the extent to which
they reciprocate their condition, or qualities, to should be used instead of
with. ,;;
1. Christ is compared with a lamb.
3. Christ is compared to a lamb.
Ii) the first, the object of the comparison, is to ascertain, or to show in
what respects, and to what extent, Christ, and a Iamb agree.
200 CONPICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
In the second, the object of the comparison, is merely to illustrate the
innocence, and purpose of the Redeemer, in relation to the sins of the world,
for which he, lamb-like, was to be offered up.
1. When illustration is the object of the comparison, to
should be used.
2. When agreement between the two things, compared, is
the object of the comparison, with should be used.
1. *' Solon compared the people to the sea ; and orators, and
counsellors, to the wind, — the sea would be calm, and quiet, if
the wind would not trouble it." — Bacon.
2. The historian compared America ivith England.
3. He compared the government of Great Britain with that
of France.
4. Who will compare this rivulet with the sea ?
5. Historians rarely compare the second, with the first
temple.
II. Possession E-dicatory. . -
70. I would trust him - - - (with my horse.)
71. James trusted his brother - - (with the secret.)
1. That is, I would trust him with the actual possession of my horse.
2. That is, James trusted his brother with the possession of the secret
72. Was any of the money found - (with the thief?)
That is, was any found in his possession ?
73. Have you a knife - . - (with you ?) .^
That is, is there a knife in your possession at this time. -j,
74. They found the silver cup - - (with Joseph.) ,;a
75. I will trust him - - - - (with goods.)
That is, I will allow him to take, to have, goods upon the confidence
which I have in his disposition, and ability to pay at a future time.
76. I am here - - - - - (with power) to act.
That is, having power, possessing power, to act.
77. James went; but he went - - (with your permission.)
That is, havingi or possessing, your permission to go.
78. "He came - - - - (with full authority) to
act."
That is, having, or possessing full authority to act.
II. Concurrent E-dicatory.
79. John stole the apples - - - (with his brother.)
The act was a joint one — they . took the apples unitedli/t coneurrentljf. .
; CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS. 201
80. "And there was a great company
of publicans, and others, that
sat down - - - - (with him.")
The act of feasting upon the banquet which Levi prepared for Christ,
was a joint one — one in which the Redeemer who is denoted by " Arm,"
concurred. Sat down (with him.) That is, with thou Jesus to the others
as concurring in the various acts at the table.
81. I work at shoe-making - - (with my brother.)
" Co7icurrent,^' signifies meeting in the same point ; running, or acting
together J united in action ; contributing to the same event, or effect"
82. I live - - - - - (with my sister.)
My sister, apd I help to form one family, the same family — ^^in this act, we
concur.
83. This slave lives - - - (with his master.)
The condiction is that the master contributes to the formation of the
same family which the slave helps to form — they both act in the production
of the same thing. In this act they are concterrent.
84. Sarah boards - - - . (with Mrs. Davis.)
There is a concurrence in the act of Mrs. Davis, and that of Sarah — both
aid in forming the same family. This is the leading idea in this kind of
sentences.
85. John studied his lesson - - (with me.)
86. James went through college - (with my brother.)
They acted concurrent It/, though each laboured for himself — they contri-
buted too to the formation of the same college family.
87. The Indians shot John • - (with his brother.)
In geometry, a figure which exactly meets every part of another figure,
is called a concurring figure. The brother in fate, in condition, exactly
meets John in fate, in condition. Hence the brother may be withed, tied,
or bound, to John. The fate of the brother, like a concurrent figure in
geometry, meets every part of the fate of John. The thing, then, which
has a concurring condition, may be subjoined by with; as, John, with his
mother, is sick.
So also may the concurring thing be subjoined by and; as, John, and
his mother is sick. (/« is right — are is common.)
What, then, is the difference between "with," and "and^ Both denote
that the condition of the subjoined thing, concurs with that of the antede-
dent thing : both words, too, give a new mono. But, then, " with''
gives a nepoeclad, but ''and,*' a poeclad. We do not say, John
went with I. Nor do we say, [John] (and me went,) (We say,
[John went] (with me.) [John , ] (and /went.)
Where the condition is concurrent with reference to the sub-
joined thing, ♦* M>t7A,'' and "and" are nearly i\xe same in Epidi'
cology. Both words convey an allusion to the agreement, to the
concurrenoef of the subjoined thing. These words, however, differ
202 COXDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
in this — '-awe?" in all cases, indicates concurrence in condition;
whereas, "wit/i" has many other imports. In other words, while
"and,'^ in its application, is confined to those instances, where
there is this concurrence to which with may allude, "with" is ap-
plied where there is no concurrence whatever in the condition of
the subjoined thing; as, John walked with his cane.
The condition of the cane is not concurrent with that of John.
Again — " and," and *^ with" differ in this: "and" is indicative
of an additional poetene,- as, [John , ;] (and I went,) [John
read the letter,] (and his brother read it.) That is, [John went ;]
(and I went.)
"With" however, is never indicative of an additional poetene,
of an additional cordiction,- as, [John went] (^with me,) [John read
the letter] (with his brother.)
In each poetrone, there is but one poetene ; in the first exam-
ple, there are two poetenes in each poetrone.
1. ["John , ;] (awe/ 1 went.")
2. [John went] {with me.)
These two poetrones difier in another point : in the first, it is
not said that we went in company, that we went together. In the
second, it is said that we went together. To say, that the Indians
shot John, and his brother, is not to say that the Indians shot John
with his brother. In the first, the events may have happened at
very different times, and in very different places, in places which
throw the one hundreds of miles from the other. In the second,
the events must have happened much at the same time, and in the
same place, i^AiVe and toAere the brother and John were together.
"With," and "and," then, are not- synonymous in meaning, much
less in Syntiihology.
What is the difference between the following sentences ]
1. Henry purchased a horse with a saddle.
2. Henry purchased a horse, and a saddle.
A very obvious difference between " and," and " with," is derived from
their conjective powers. ''And'^ cannot be conjected to a word, whereas
** with" can be conjected to nothing but ^word: "and" is always con-
jected to an entire mono, whereas " with" can never be conjected to a mono.
Hence "and" is a »»onoclade, while " with" is a single-word clade.
88. "John ----- (with his horse) was
drowned."
89. " IVIust our fortunes be twisted - (with your sinking
fate?")
Must our fortunes, and your fate^ concur in fate %
90. Our condition is so connected - (with yours) that we
must sink, or swim together.
91. Henry purchased a horse - - (with asaddle."^
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS. 20$
92. "Simon Peter {writes) to them
that have obtained the like pre-
cious faith - , - - . - (with us.")
In what do they concur 1 in the act of receiving, in the act of obtaining T
no. Peter, and those whom he includes with himself, under the word, us,
concur with those to whom he wrote, in this — they had all obtained the
same kind of faith : in the kind of faith obtained, they agreed, they concur-
red. This is an important instance, for this must either be rejected as bad
— or the following must be received as good :
*♦ Henry got the same kind of book with James.
Identity in the kind of their books, is that in which Henry, and James
concur. Identity, then, in the thing possessed, is^ood ground for the use
of with.
II. Contest Ex-e-dic-a-tory. ~
93. " He will lie - - - - (with any man) liv-
ing." Against.
94. " The champions fought - - (with each other) an
hour." Against.
95. These men have long struggled - (with adversity.)
Against.
96. This horse ran - - - - (with that , .)
Against.
These horses are connected — they concur in their situation, inasmuch as
one is pitted against the other.
II. In-fatour-of E-dicatory.
97. " Fear not, for I am - - - (with thee.")
[Gen. Xxvi.
98. " Go — and may the Lord be - (with you.")
99. " He fell not, for the Lord was - (with him.")
II. PWRPOSE E-DICATORY.
100. ** I went to Boston - - - (with a view) to see
him."
101. " Henry came to my house - (with a view) to see
me."
102. " Did he seem to act - (with a determination)
to succeed?"
II. In-refkrence-to E-dicatory.
103. " Has Mr. Jones don€ any thing (with respect) to his
claim?"
204 CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
104. " Henry Davis is resolved to do
nothing - - - - (with regard) to his
own election."
II. Conversant E-dicatory.
105. John acquainted his mother - (with his success.)
Doctrine. — Where the superior mono contains a word which imports a
high degree of knowledge, with begins the clad which mentions
the thing of which this high degree of knowledge is possessed by some one
mentioned in the superior mono ; as,
" John acquainted his mother (with his success.)
Acquainted is in the superior mono, and denotes the giving of a critical
knowledge by John to his mother. Success is the clad thing of
which the mother possesses a minute knowledge. The word, acquainted,
denotes the act of making the mother familiar, conversant, with the success
of the son — hence tvith is used instead of of. But why is with preferable
to of? With means a full, unreserved connection. He acquainted his
mother with his success. That is, with, bind, tie, his success to his mother.
Why use a word which imports tihis close connection of his success to the
mother 1 Because the word, acquainted, in the superior mono, means that
degree of knowledge which corresponds to the close connection of which
vjtth is the sign.
*' John acquainted his mother of his success."
With imports that the success, entire, is withed, bound, to the mother.
Of, however, imports no such thing, no such idea. Of imports that
the success is a source of the act of acquainting the mother. . Beyond
this, of does not go. The nature of the caae shows that the success
is the subject source — hence, as far a subject is a source of knowledge,
the success is a source of the mother's knowledge of her son's success. But
the word, acquainted, means the giving of a minute knowledge ; and, as
of does not indicate the degree of knowledge' of which the success is a
source, of, and acquainted do not correspond — hence of should not be used.
The import of the sentence with of for with, is that John spoke of his sue-*
cess to his mother. That is, he mentioned it to her. But the import of
the sentence with with in the place of of is that John made his mother
familiar with, well acquainted, with the entire subject of his success. There
is nonepoeclidein the language, which denotes a closer, and a /u/^r connec-
tion than with. This may be seen from instances which fall under the
Appendage Edicatory.
1. The trunk with its branch, was taken.
The branch is a part of the tree — hence with is employed to denote this
natural, and close relation.
2. He wrote the letter with accuracy.
Here the accuracy is as minutely connected to the action of writing, as
the branch is to the trunk — and the connection is denoted by with. An
appendage is not any thing, or any being that is joined to another thing, or
being. An appendage is a branch thing which is joined to another thing
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADSk 205
as a part of the other thing, as a roof to a house, a key to a lock, a chaxn ta
a watch, a mode to a subject, «&c.
106. " Mr. Webster is familiar - (with all our constitu-
tions.")
107. ** He was a man of sorrow, and
acquainted - - - - (with grief.")
0/is used before sorrow, because there is no word in the super mono
which imports any degree of knowledge, much less a high degree. The
mtroduction of such a word; would throw out of, and introduce with .•
He was a man acquainted with sonrow, and grief.
II. Forbearance E-dicatory.
108. "Reason would that I should
bear - . - _ . (with you.")
[Acts xviii.
lOd. •' Shall not God avenge his elect,
though he bear long - - (with them ?")
[^LuKE xviii.
110. ** Would to God you could bear (with me,) a little in
my folly."— 2 Cor. xi. 1.
It may be thought that the idea of forbearancCj is derived from the
eladef bear. This, however, is so far from the truth that the notion of
forbearance, is commenced in the clad, with you. This will be
obvious from a little attrition to the various imports of the word, bear.
Bear, to produce fruit, to act in any character, to make haste, as to bear a
hand, to show, or exhibit, as to bear testimony, &c. &c.
II. Tutorage E-nioATORT.
111. Henry Davis Studied law ^ - (with Daniel Webster.)
112. Mr. Joab Brace must have studied
grammar - - - . (with Lennie) himself.
That is, under the care, instruction, or tutorage, of Lennie.
113. The professor of religion should
show in his daily intercourse
with men, that he has been - (with Christ.)
That is, that he has been under the tutorage of Christ
114. " From the statement of this wit-
ness, I presume that he has
been (with the defendant.")
That is, that the witness has been under the tutorage of the defendant.
II. Contrast E-dicatory.
115. ("With the Unitarian,) - - Christ is a mere man "
^ ' 18
206 CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
That is, with, join, or add, the Unitarians to Christ ; and he is a mere
man : Christ is a mere man with the Unitarians.
This form of expression, however, suggests that there are persons who
in their connection with Christ, make him a God : hence the notion of con-
trast.
116. (With the Presbyterians,) - - Christ is God himself.
117. (*' With the industrious man,) - there is generally
enough."
118. (*' With the idle man,) - - there is generally too
little."
'* With him,) - . - . nothing is right."
" With his brother,) - - nothing is wrong."
[" With the ancients,) - - tragedy was originally
a piece of religious worship."
Here the ancients, and modems are contrasted in reference to their different
views of tragedy. The original estimation in which the ancients held tra-
gedy, and more modern views of the subject, axe contrasted.
122. (" With the Sioux Indians,) - dogs are beasts of bur-
den."
12^. (" With all savage tribes,) - skins are converted into
clothing."
124. ('* With some people,) - - one remedy is em-
ployed for all diseases."
125. f" With a philosopher,) - - demonstration is joy."
126. (" With you,) - - - - the word of the Lord
has free course."
Here it is intimated that the reverse is the case in some places. The
same mono, however, in the following, is not of the contrast Edica-
tory. ,
" May the word of the Lord have free course (with youJ'^)
It is not wished here that the word of the Lord may not have free course
in all other places. But in the following it is intimated that the word of
the Lord has not free course in all.
(" With you,) the word of the Lord has free course."
In general, the nepoeclad of the contrast Edicatory, should begin
the poetene.
(It is seen, then, that contrast is an occasion on which
with may begin a clad.)
n. Subject E-dicatory.
127. " This gentleman had great
weight - - - - - (with the President.")
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS. 207
When the President is withed, joined, or brought, in contact with the
weight, the influence of this gentleman, he, the President, was swayed,
much influenced by it. And in exact proportion to the influence which the
weight, the opinion, of this gentleman, exerted over the President, the Pre-
sident was controlled by this weight. The President, then, was, to a greater,
or less extent, suhjeded to the weight, to the influence, of this gentleman.
Hence he, the President, was as much a subject of this weight as is any man
or woman, who is a native of England, and who resides in London, a
subject of the British crown.
128. That circumstance had great
weight Twith the jury.)
129. This argument had much influence (with the judge.)
130. No reasoning will have much
weight ----- (with the fool.)
131. These demonstrations had invin-
cible influence - - - (with those pagan phi-
losophers.)
Being subject to, or influenced by, then, sometimes furnishes an occasion
for the use of with. We never say exerted great influence with him, but
we say aver him, on him.
II. Prevalence E-dioatory.
132. ** I thought him an innocent man,
and - - - - - (with this impression)
I did what I could to procure his pardon."
" Prevalence, influence, or efficacy, most efficacious force in producing an
effect" Now, what was it which was prevalent, which was efficacious, with
me in inducing me to do all that I could to obtain his pardon % it was this
impression. What impression ? the impression that he was an innocent
man. It was tlie prevalence, the influence, of this impression which
induced me to act. It may be well to advert to the clads under the
subject Edicatory, which begin with with.
" The duke well knew what kind of arguments was of pre-
valence {with him.'''')
Here the clad thing is under the control, under the influence, of
the arguments. In the Prevalence Edicatoiy, the clad thing
is so far from being under control, that it exerts a controlling influence on
some person in another mono.
133. " If any one should take up this
work - - - - - (with the impression)
that he has met with another Murray's Grammar, &c."
Roswell C. Smith's Grammar.
That is, should any one take up this work under the prevalence, under
the influence, of the impression tlwit he has met with another Murraj't
Grammar, &c.
208 CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
Perfiaps the use of under, would be better than tnat of with, in this par-
ticular case. With, aidetl by the context, seems to carry the idea that the
impression under whose prevalence the act is done, is in fact the instrument
with which it is done. " If any one should take up this work with the
impression," &c.
The impression, when connected with the act of taking up, seems to
resemble an instrument rather than a cause. We take up books with
the hand. I do not think, however, that the use of ivith in the above
instance, is a very great impropriety. But, from the errors which pervade
the rest of the sentence, I am disposed to attribute tlie propriety in this use
of with more to chance than to knowledge.
"If any one should take up this work with the impression
that he has met with another Murray's Grammar, he is re-
spectfully requested to suspend his judgment, &c."
Mr. Smith intends to say another Grammar — but he has not only failed
in this attempt ; but he has actually created a second Murray 1 Says Mr.
Smith, you have not found the well known Lindley Murray's Grammar
in the work which you have just taken up, bijt a Grammar of another
Murray ! I presume that this other Murray is Roswell C. Smith Murray !
1. Another Joy's book.
2. Another marCs hat.
3. Another Murray's Grammar.
Corrected. — Should any one take up this book under the
impression that he has found another Grammar by Mr. Mur-
ray , he is respectfully requested to suspend his judgment till
a careful perusal of its contents has furnished some data
upon which to predicate a just, and candid opinion of its
merits.
1. Upon should be exchanged for of: we can not properly say, predi-
cate on, or upon.
2. The words, its, contents, some, data, upon, which, to, predicate, a,
just, and, candid, opinion, and of, are redundant!!
3. ^Has furnished" should be exchanged for shall have furnished.
4. If should be rejected, and should should be the first word in the
sentence.
5. If any mau should take up this work with the impres-
sion that he has met with another Murray's Grammar, &c.
Now, a man who is under this impression, would not be very likely to
take up Mr. Smith's book at all ! What, pray, could induce any one to
take it up 1 Mr. Smith says that the impression that it is another Mur-
ray's Grammar induces him to take it up. If any one should take up this
book with the impression that it is, &c. Now, it appears to me that this
impression would rather induce one to lay it down than to take it up !
Indeed does not Mr. Smith himself mean this \
From a slight glance, some may be under the impression,
that this work is nothing but Murray'' s Grammar.
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS. 209
Or—
From a slight glance, some may lay down this work,
under the impression that it is nothing but another edition of
Murray's Grammar.
What a grammarian must he be, who by a blunder in syntax, gives that
as the cause for taking up, which he intends as the cause for laying
dawn ! Things seem strangely inverted by grammarians : " taking up'*
is used for throwing down, and " throwing dowvH^ for taking up, so that
Mr. Smith will hardly know whether I have taken him up, or thrown him
down ! But should he find much difficulty in settling this point, I would
commend his case to the teachers of our public schools, who, from a long
familiarity with his work, must be able to give him prompt relief! In
the mean time I must be excused for putting Mr. Smith's old wine into a
new bottle.
Those, who, from a slight glance at this work, are under
the impression that it is Murray^s Grammar, are invited to
correct their error by a full examination, (28 words.)
" If any one should take up this work with the impression
that he has met with another Murray's Grammar, he is re-
spectfully requested to suspend his judgment till a careful pe-
rusal of its contents has furnished some data on which to pre-
dicate a just and candid opinion of its merits. (51 words.)
(23 redundant words.)
n. Successor E-dicatoby.
134. "He replied, you are a dead
man ; and - - - - (with this , ) dis-
charged his pistoV^
The mono, " vnth this,*' indicates that the discharging of the pistol is
the successor of the uttering of, " You are a dead man?* With the event
of discharging the pistol to the event of uttering the affirmation, " You are
a dead man." No event, then, came between these — whence the withed
one is the successor event {Successive does not express the idea.)
II. Union E-dioatort.
135. Falstaff at that oak, shall meet - (with us.) — Shak.
That is, Falstaflf shall unite with us, comQ into a union with us— join
our company.
II. Contact E-dicatory.
III. Incident Ex-e-dic-a-tory.
136. "We met - - (with this gentleman) in i?o«^on."
137. " We met - - (with rare things) on the way."
138. " We met - - (with curiosities) everywhere.'*
d\0 CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
II. Reception E-dicatory.
III. Accident Ex-e-dic-a-tory .
139 "They met - - - - (with a fall) on ^/»e ice."
140. *' They have met - - - (with heavy losses) at
seaJ*^
II. Foreign E-dicatory.
141. How is business - - - (with the Bostonians ?)
142. Is business brisk - - - (with you?)
143. Why is it that fruit trees do not
grow well - - - - (with us ?)
This clad alwaya conveys an aHosion to some one who is dis-
tinct, separate, from the speaker. Even in the mono, " with us" there is
an allusion made to others.
144. " Finally, brethren, pray for us,
that the word of the Lord may
have free course, and be glori-
fied even as it is - - - (with you.")
WITH~A KEPOBCXEB.
Wt^A is a nepoecled where it terminates a trone or a poe-
clad ; as, Henry was spoken with upon the subject. (Perhaps to would be
better.)
Remarks. — From denoting the means with which the fence-maker
brings one stake to the other, with has come to denote the act of bringing
one thing to another ; from denoting the act of bringing one thing to
another, with has come to denote the state of subiunction — and from
denoting the state of subjunction of the withed thing, with has come
to convey an allusion to the nature of that connection which the
withed, or subjoined thing, has to the other thing. That is, whether it is
a causative relation ; as, John is sick with a eold- a medium relation ; as
John walked with his cane- — a competition relation ; as, John will lie with
any man in town — a similarity relation ; as, John compared this country
with France — a prevalence relation ; as. If any one should take up this
work with the impression that he has met with another Murray's Gram-
mar" — a succession r^ation ; as, John said that he had a dirk, and, with
this, seized the stranger. And so on.
I think that I have found, and illustrated the various cases in which with
may begin an clad. If, however, instances should occur, which
do not fall under any of the Edicatories that I have given, let the
pupil, or teacher himself find a distinctive name for a new Edicatory.
That all the raonos which begin with xvith, fall naturally under the Con-
junctive Rudicatory, admits of no doubt. And I would recommend
teachers to examine with great care before they attempt to provide a new
Edicatory for any doubtful
Class the clads which begin with -wiTa.
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS, 211
1. **In Damascus the governor kept the city (with a gar-
rison.")
2. *' Thrice was I beaten (with rods.")
3. ** Seize on him, furies — take him to your torments !
{With that , ), methought a legion of foul fiends
environed me."
4» " And when I was present (with you,) and wanted, I was
chargeable to no man."
5. Would to God you could bear (with me) a little in my
folly : and indeed bear (with me.) For I am jealous
over you (with a godly jealousy.)
6. " We have a building of God,^a house not made (with
hands,) eternal in the heavens."
7. ** For in this we groan, earnestly desiring to be clothed
upon (with our house) which is from heaven."
8. ** We then, as workers together (with him,) beseech you
also, that ye receive not the grace of God in vain."
9. « Simon Peter, a servant, and an apostle of Jesus Christ,
{writes) to them that have obtained like precious faith
(with us,) through the righteousness of God, and our
Saviour, Jesus Christ."
10. " Who is like unto the beast — who is able to make war
(with him?")
11. "And it was given unto him to make war (with the
saints.")
12. " He that killeth (with the sword,) must be killed (with
the sword.")
13. *' And the earth was lightened (with his glory.'') "And #
he cried mightily (with a strong voice.")
14. " And she shall be utterly burned (with fire.")
15. " See where on earth the flow'ry glories lie,
(With her) they flourish, and (with her) they die."— Popie.
16. (" With the blessing) of God we hope to reach home to-
day."
17. I agree (with my opponent.) Concurrent.
18. ♦^In the beginning was the Word; and the Word was
(with God ;) and the Word was God."
19. " You are buried (with him) in baptism, wherein also you
are risen (with him) through the faidi of the: operation
of God."
20. "If ye then be risen (with Christ,) seek those things
which are above.'
312 CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS
21. " And be not entangled again (with the yoke) of bondage."
22. I shall not differ Cwith you.) Quarrel with.
23. ** We were gratified (with the presence) of a person so
much respected."
24. *' Ye crags, and peaks, I'm (with you) once again — I
hold to you the hands you first beheld." — Tell.
25. It is of unspeakable advantage to possess our minds (with
an habitual good intention.) — Addison.
26. " The duke better knew what kind of arguments, was
prevalent (with him.") — Clarendon.
27. " Prepare to meet (with more) than brutal force from the
fierce prince." — Bacon,
Illustration of the condiction WitJlOUt (with, and out.)
of the nepoeciads which be- J. Detractive Ru-dica.
%m With without. II. Destitution E-dicatory.
1. "He is always- - - - (without money.")
2. " There is no living - - - (without thee.")
_This steroclade, without, is explained under the head of with. (See
with.'')
3. '* Henry is - - - - (without a hat.")
4. " They are - . . ' . (without hope) in
Christ:'
II. Local E-dicatory.
5. " Henry stood - - - . (without the gate.")
6. " James was eating - - - (without the door.")
III. Beyond Ex-e-dic-a-tory,
7. " Eternity is - - - - (without our reach.")
II. Condition E-dicatory.
8. " The most advantageous terms from
the French, must end in our de-
struction - - - - (without the separa-
tion) of the two monarchies. '''
H. Independent-of E-dicatory.
9. " Men like to live - - - (without labour.")
10. "Wise men will do right - - (without laws.)
That is, independent of laws.
II. Result E-dicatory.
11. That event may happen - - (without any danger.)
CONDICTION or NEPOECLADS. 213
12. " That event cannot take place - (without damage) to
our interests,"
13. They can live together - - (without any difficulty.)
That is, no difficulty will result from their living together.
14. They cannot live together - - (without difficulty.)
15. They cannot labour - - - (without success.)
That is, success will be the result.
16. They have laboured - - - (without success.)
That is, no success is the result of their labour.
II. Omission E-dicatobt
17. John came out - - - - (without his hat.)
(See example 3.)
WITHOUT— Never a nepoecled.
Without is never a nepoeclide -hence it cannot be used in the place of
unless, even where it would have the sense of unless ,- as, " I will not go
without you do."
Class the nepoeclads which begin with without.
1. There is a house (without a roof.)
2. I have come (without my gun.)
3. (*' Without , , ) were fightings, within , , were
fears.
4. *' These were (from , , ) ( , , ) (without the
growing miseries.")
These were (from the place) (which is) (without the growing miseries.)
That is, they are from the place which is not inside, but which is out-
side of the growing miseries.
TO THE PUPIL.
On the €ighty-eighth page I have given a specimen of Ap-
propriation* Should the pupil find any difficulty in deciding
the exact condiction of any nepoedad in the Exercises which
follow, he should resort to the Doctrinal Notes, in the preced-
ing pages.
The learner will derive much help from a careful attention to
the page of Dicatories. The title, Dicatory of Ne-po-e-clads.
•^'
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLABS. 2l5
DIRECTIONS.
Appropriate the following Exercises exactly according to
the specimen under page 88.
Be particular to give the doctrine^ especially of the condic-
tion of the nepoeclads. In doing this, you will derive consi-
derable aid from a critical perusal of the Doctrinal Remarks
in the preceding pages. Let the class prepare ten, fewer or
more, of the instances which fall under ABOUT, for one
Lesson. This preparation should be made by a close examina-
tion of the Doctrinal Notes on the condiction of the nepoeclads
which begin with ABOVE. Continue in this way through all
the Exercises These being exhausted, appropriate in the New
Testament.
ABOUT.— Exercises.
1. The belt was - - - (about his waist.)
2. "Bind them - - - (about thy neck.")
3. It was six feet • - - (about the trunk.)
4. " Get you up from - - (about the tabernacle.")
5. They were sitting - - (about the fire.)
6. « He went out - - (about the third hour.")
7. " Paul was - - - (about to open his mouth.")
« To open his mouthy*' is the nepoecorm of about,
8. " They were - - (about to flee out) of the ship.''^
9. They were then - - (about sixty men.)
10. Everything - - - (about you) is in orJer.
11. They stood - - - (about the room.)
12. His knife was not - - (about him.)
13. My father is - - - (about the house.)
14. I was speaking - - (about my brother's house.)
15. He was reading - - (about General Washington.)
16. "I must be - - - (about my father's business.")
17. James was then - - (about his work.)
18. John is now - - - (about his writing.)
19. He is wandering - - (about , ,) from place to place.
20. Why go ye - - - (about , ,) to injure me.
21. Scatter the sands - - (about , ,)
216
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
ABOVE.— Exercises.
1. My h^nd was
3. The powers which are
3. Henry then went -
1. His conduct was
2. They now live
3. They wrote copies -
4. The light was
5. He was seen by
6. The weight is now -
7. Hannaniah feared God.
8. This man is -
9. A real gentleman is
10. They gave stripes -
11. He is now
12. Indeed he is almost
13. Give me peace
14. But - - -
(above his head.)
(above , , .)
(above me.)
(above board.)
(above board.) f.
"— ??"
(above an hour.) ^ ^
(above the sun's brightness.)
(above five hundred brethren.)
(above six pounds.)
(above many , .)
(above mean actions.)
(above disguise.)
(above measure.)
(above his business.)
(above himself.)
(above all other things.)
(above all , , .)
15. "The Lord thy God will
set thee - - -
16. The law should be -
(above all nations.")
(above all men.)
AFTER.-— Exercises.
1. These men stood one - (after another.)
2. He came
1. He was named
2. He made this machine
3. Did he cut his coat -
4. John, have you come
5. I will send an officer
6. I have now come -
7. " Ye shall not go -
(after me.)
Behind.
Behind,
(after his uncle.)
(after that model.)
(after mine ?)
(after your book ?)
(after you.)
(after the papers.)
(after other gods.*')
CONDIGTION OF NEPOECLADS. 217
8. They walk - - - (after the flesh.)
9. They judge - - - (after the sight,)
10. Does he consider things - (after their real value ?)
11. Can you drink - - (after me ?)
ACROSS.— Exercises.
1. He went - - - (across the street.)
2. We looked - - - (across the river.)
3. There was a bridge - (across the stream.)
AMID, AMIDST.— Exercises.
1. He is now - . - (amid the waves.)
2. I was - - - - (amidst the shade.)
3. The shepherd was - - (amidst his flock.)
4. How could I comprehend (amid all this confusion ?)
AMONG, AMONGST— Exercises.
1. He is sending agents - (among his friends.)
2. " He sends his blessings - (amongst his enemies.")
3. He immediately went - (amongst the people.)
4. And he is now - - (among them.)
AROUND, ROUND.— Exercises.
1. There was a belt - - (around his waist.)
2. They all sat - - - (round the fire.)
3. He has sailed - - - (round the world.)
4. They then went - - (around the hill.)
5. They were seated - - (round the table.)
6. The mother called her
children - - - (around her.)
7. They are now strolling - (around the country.)
8. They rove - - - (round the world.)
9. " They went - - - (around , ,) about the camp.^*
10. They are fond of riding - (round , , .)
AT. — Exercises.
1. John was - - - (at church.)
2, I was X present) - - (at the trial.)
^■t
218
CONDICTION
01
? NEPOECLADS.
3.
My father is not -
(at home.)
4.
They are now
(at ease.)
5.
They are now
(at play.)
6.
The pen is now
Tat hand.)
(at a loss) for words.
7.
He was then -
8.
The bill was to be paid
(at sight.)
9.
I told you this
(at first , .)
(at best.)
10.
He is a poor tool -
11.
He made no reply -
(at all , ) to them.
12.
He aims
(at this mark.)
13.
1 shall not be there -
(at all events.)
14.
He purchased the gloves
3 -
(at a small price.)
15.
I am -
(at your service.)
16.
I am -
(at your command.)
17.
You shall return
(at my cost.)
18.
It was done -
(at his suggestion.)
19.
He deserves well -
(at our hands.)
20.
He was surprised -
.
(at this statement.)
21.
He was troubled
(at this report.)
22.
He was much pleased
(at this event.)
23.
He is now
(at the law.)
24.
He is a student
(at law.)
25.
He is good -
(at figures.)
26.
He was good -
(at engraving.)
27.
He struck
(at me.)
28.
They shot -
(at him.)
29.
He laughed -
(at them.)
30.
They are
(at variance.)
31.
They have long been
-
(at swords' points.)
32.
Texas is - -
-
(at war.)
33.
He longs to be
-
(at him.)
ATHWART
'.- — Exercises.
1.
He advanced hia mis-
created front
.
(athwart my way.)
2.
The fleet stood
-
(athwart our course.)
%'
Wfff
■^.
CONDICTION or NEPOECLADS. 219
BEFORE.— Exercises.
1. He stood - - - (before his desk.)
2. He is not behind, but - (before me.)
3. "Wherewithal shall I come (before the Lord.")
4. They are now - - (before this court.)
5. " Abraham bowed - - (before the people) o/'fAe/anc?.'*
1. "The world was all - (before them.")
1. He that cometh after me,
is preferred - - (before me,) [above me]
for he was before me.
1. " And he set Ephraim - (before Manasseh.")
2. " He esteemed virtue - (before gold.")
3. " Poverty is desirable - (before torments.")
BEHIND.— Exercises.
1." Get thee - - - (behind me,) ^a/an."
2. The book lies - - (behind the table.)
3. He sat - - - - (behind that tree.)
4. He rode - - - [behind me.)
5. He rode - - - (behind , .)
6. Look - - - - (behind , .)
1. In Syntithology John is - (behind his brother.)
2. In history I am - - (behind my class.)
3. " I was not a whit - - (behind the very chiefest apos-
tles.")
4. " They cast thy laws - (behind their back.") Heb,
xix. Without heed,
Sin-i, without.
5. Forgetting those things
which are - - - (behind , .) Phil. iii.
6. We should not forget what
is . ;« - " - (behind , .) - , . ►
2^
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
7. " And fill up that which is (behind , ,) of the afflictions
of Christ in my flesh." i
8. Alas ? we do not know "*
what is - - - (behind , .)
9. Is there much evidence yet (behind , ?)
10. We know not what evi-
dence is - - - (behind , .)
11. There is a small sum - (behind , , .)
12. There are sixty dollars - (behind , , .)
13. He has gone, and left us - (behind , .)
14. Be went there, but left us (behind , .)
BELOW.— Exercises.
1. The earth is -
2. The chain is -
3. Man lives
4. Man is the fairest one
5. He hit -
6. The water is -
7. The water is -
8. He purchased it
9. This note is -
10.
11.
12.
He is -
A lieutenant is
He appealed
court
from the
(below the heavens*)
(below the mouth.}
(below , , .)
(below r » •)
(below the mark.)
(below the mark.)
(below the banks.)
(below the first cost.)
(below par.)
(below me) in the class,
(below a captain.)
(below , , .)
BENEATH.— Exercises.
1. He stood
2. The earth is -
3. He had a cushion -
4. The earth from
5. Has he conducted
6. This act is -
7. He was
(beneath the branch.) under,
(beneath the heavens.) under,
(beneath him.) under,
(beneath , .)
(beneath his station ?)
(beneath a gentleman.)
(beneath her notice.)
^^'
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
221
8. They will sink
^ 9. Did Milo sink
10. An ox ranks -
11. Man is -
12. " Our country sinks
13. We have sunk
14. He was borne down
(beneath their burden.)
(beneath the ox) which he car-
ried on his back ?
(beneath a man.)
(beneath angels.)
(beneath the yoke.")
(beneath his taxation.)
(beneath the burden) of his
sins.
BESIDE.— Exercises
He sat -
They were seated -
4. "It is
John is -
" Paul, thou art
To all - -
i saw nothing
- (beside me.)
- (beside the stream.)
- (Beside all this,) there is a
great gulf between us,
and you.
' (beside my present purpose)
to enlarge upon this
subject."
- (beside himself.)
- (beside thyself.'*)
- (beside , ) as much an
empty shade.
' (beside this book.)
BEYOND.— Exercises.
1. He went
2. He travelled far
3. My stick reached -
4. " Let no man go
- (beyond that tree.)
- (beyond that river.)
- (beyond his , .)
- (beyond , , ) and defraud
his brother." . ^•
5. [" A thing] (
(beyond us) even before out
death."
19*
i5»jtd. Y^f). vjiii. '-«.'■• "f"
222
CONDICnON OF NEPOECLADS-
6. To comprehend this is
7» This doctrine is
8. To pay this note is
(beyond my power.)
(beyond human comprehen
sion.)
(beyond his power.)
9. Washington was great
10. This matter is mysterious
11. This night is dark -
12. Let no man think that he
is wise - - -
(beyond any other man.)
(beyond any other , .)
(beyond all others.)
(beyond what , ) ( ,
( , is written.)
BY. — Exercises.
1 . He came - - (by land.) on land,
2. There have been great
battles - - . (by water.) on water,
3. We shall return - (by water.) on water.
4. His house stands
5. I was sitting -
6. 1 stood -
7. The man had come
8. He just passed
9. Who passed -
•)
(by mine ,
[by the fire.)
by the river side.)
fby this time.)
(by the window.)
iO. A gentleman was - (by
11. Was any one - - (by
12. Joseph remained there "(by the space) of seven years.
) at the time,
) at the time ?
13.
14.
He swore
He afiirmed
- (byheaVen) to be just.
- (by all) that is sacred.
15. The stick is too long (by an inch.)
16. The tea is too heavy (by six pounds.)
17. He works
18. The fact appears
19. Does he live -
(by the perch.)
:i
by John's own statement,
by any fixed rules ?)
20. He has a cask of wine (by him.)
21. He had thirty dollars (by him.)
CONDIGTION OP NEPOECLADS. 223
22. He lives - - - (by himself.J
23. He sat - - - (by himself.)
24. Put this book - - (by itself.)
25. " I shall stand - - (by him,) come what will.*
26. I was at court - - (by my attorney.)
27. The temple was built (by Solomon.)
28. These houses were built (by Stephen Girard.)
29. He works - - (by a candle.)
30. He saw the pin - (by moonlight.)
31. He travelled day - (by day.)
32. He counted his army
man - - - (by man.)
33. He commanded the
army year - - (by year.)
1. How came he - (by so much land?)
2. How came James - (by that house ?)
3. This pen was made - (by John.)
4. This land is owned - (by my brother.)
5. The sinner is converted (by Qhrist.)
6. I am commanded - (by the people) of the State ej
Pennsylvania,
7. The grass was killed (by the frost.)
8. He was hurt - - (by a fall.)
9. He has been injured (by the tricks) of Jude,
10. He was killed - (by a sword.)
11. He saw the pin - (by moonlight.)
12. They live - - ^by speculation.)
13. They applied - - (by a petition.)
14. Do you know a man (by the name) of Paul?
,-M.. 1...'.. . . -^
224
CONDICTION OF NErOECLADS.
DOWN.— Exercises.
1. He is -
2. They went
3. They sailed -
4. We are all going
5. He went up, and
6. They went
7. He came
8. The squirrel ran
9. The deer swam
- Mown the country.)
- fdown the hill.)
- fdoWn the river.)
- fdown the stream) of life,
- (down , , ,\
[down the hill.)
[down stairs.)
[down the tree.)
[down, the stream.)
.««^
FROM. — Exercises.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Henry went
Separate the good
Men go -
And , ,
He looked down
He came
Call the dog -
ffrom Boston) to Texas.
(from the bad , .)
(from good
(from bad
(from ,
(from ,
(from , ,
Wo
) to
had, . r:;
good.
) , , above.
) beyond, ,
, under the table.
Light proceeds - (from the sun.)"^^
Men have all sprung (from Adam.)
Water springs -
Money is acquired
He descended -
All things sprung
This light is -
"And - - ^
is not dead."
This yarn was spun - (from that wool.)
Can any good thing
come - - - (from Nazareth.)
- (from the earth.)
- (from industry.) '
- (from a noble race.)
- (from God.)
- (from that lamp.)
- (from this , ) it seems that he
The horse is
The horse is
The horse is
The fork is
Henry is good
IN.- — Exercises.
- (in the stable.)
- (in the harness.)
- (in the carriage.)
- (in the knife case.)
- (in deed.)
6. Washington was great (in fact.)
%,■-
?j
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
225
7. These balls are alike
8 God will judge all
i>. One
10. Heis -
11. John is -
12. John did right
13. The horse is -
lour.)
14. John is kind -
15. Heis -
16. He is -
17. Henry is
18. The man is -
19. John is kind
20. He is -
21. Henry is
22. He is -
23. He is -
24. He did it
25. He was -
26. He is
27. Heis -
28. He was -
29. I command you
Pennsylvania.
30. I got the wine
m size.]
in that 1
in five.)
in that office.)
in sight.)
- (in replying) to me.
- (in a good case.)
(in sickness.)
(in good spirits.)
(in good health.)
'in pain.)
in a severe fit.)
in sickness.)
'in good spirits.)
[in a high fever.)
'in good heart.)
in good courage.)
[in good faith.)
•in his right reason.)
in the darkness) of the night.
fin doubt.)
[in fear.)
- (in tne name) of the people ot
- (in John's name.)
1. There is carbonic acid (in coal.)
2. Latent heat is - (in air.)
3. There is nourishment (in bread.)
4. We find the fishes - (in the water,)
5. and the birds - - (in the air.)
6. There are 1000 pages Cm the book.)
7. There are three pieces (in the apple.)
INTO.— Exercises.
He went -
I put the knife -
"Water enters -
I looked -
"Put these ideas
- Tinto the house.)
- finto my pocket.) not in.
- (into the fine vessels) of plants.
- (into the room.) j^-
- (into other words.")
226 CONDIOTION OF NEPOECLADS.
6. One river runs- - (into another.)
7. " They went down - (into the water.")
8. He plunged - - (into the snow.)
9. He turned some water (iijto wine.)
10. '* He turned water - (into wine.")
11. "Command that these
stones be made - (into bread.")
12. Make this leather - (into boots.)
13. Reduce all these sub-
stances - - - (into one mass.)
14. " Put more animation (into your composition.'*)
15. The instillation of ar-
dour - - - (into the mind.)
16. There is an infusion
of zeal - - - (into the mind.)
17. I dislike the infusion
of Gallicisms - - (into English.)
18. "Put other ingredients (into the compound.")
19. How many ingredients
have been put - - (into this medicine.)
%0. You should not put
horses, and sheep - (into the same drove.)
21. The child was fright-
ened - - - (into fits.)
22. Evidence puts us - (into a belief) of truth.
23. "We reduce many
distinct substances - (into one mass.")
24. Men are often enticed (into the commission) of crime,
25. "We are all liable to
be seduced - - (into error.") i , ^
26. The cup was broken (into several parts.)
27. The land was divided (into six lots.)
OFF. — ^Exercises.
1. James is now - - (off his seat.)
2. James is not - - (off his bed.)
CONDICTION OP NEPOECI4ADS.
3. James was - - (off his guard.)
227
1. "They were seen - (off the Cape) of Good Hope *'
1. The paper is -
2. Some fell
3. The ball rolled
4. He plays -
5. Joseph plays -
6. John is -
7. "They depend
8. His cure depends
9. My dependence
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
ON. — Exercises.
- (on the desk.)
- (on good ground.)
- (on the carpet.)
- (on the drum.)
- (on the violin.)
- (on his horse.)
Man should depend
Man's salvation de-
pends - - -
I agreed to go -
me,
I affirm -
He declared
well treated.
His blood be -
and his blood be
(on him) to pay the note."
(on his care.)
(on him) is well known.
(on the promises) of God."
(on this condition.)
- (on condition) that you would pay
' (on my word) that he was well.
' (on his Jionour) that I should be
- (on us ;)
- (on our children.)
His blood be {on us,) and {on our children.
They will have compassion (on him.")
19. He preached -
20. John retired
21. "He was
22. They were
23. He is -
24. He was -
25. They were
26. He appears
27. We find ruin -
28. Men meet with loss -
29. He suffered affliction
30. The thunder came peal
31. He saw heap -
32. He came - - -
on last Sabbath.)
on your approach.)
Jon the look-out) /or h^rn.''
on the alert.)
on duty.)
on guard.)
(on their guard.)
(on public occasions.)
on ruin.)
Jon loss.)
on affliction.)
on peal.)
on heap.)
[on a sudden. )
228
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS^
33. He came -
34. The ship is
■■!
on an errand) of love,
on shore.")
35.
He is now - - (
Jon his way.J
on the road.)
36.
He was then - - (
37.
He is - - -(
fon the road) to fame.
38.
They are - - |
[on their way) home.
39.
Henry was - - i
(on his way) to ruin.
40.
He is always - - (
[on the wing.)
41.
He was - - -
(on the alert.)
42. The ship was -
43. Jefferson City is
44. Vandalia stands
45. The British fleet
■-[
(on Galveston Island.)
(on the Missouri river.)
on the Kaskaskia river.)
was on the American coast.)
OVER. — Exercises.
1. He held the umbrella
2. The smoke rose
3. The flag was waving
4. " The mercy-seat
5. There was a window
6. The hat hung -
7. The cat jumped
8. The deer jumped
9. The water ran -
10. The horse jumped -
1 1 . The lad stepped
12. He went - - -
13. He went -
14. "He remained -
over his head.)
over the city.)
over our heads.)
(over the testimony.'*)
over the door.)
over the table.)
(over the table.)
(over the stream.)
(over the dam.)
Tover the fence.)
^over the pin.)
[over , , Wo England.
'over , , ) ^0 the other party.
[over night.")
15. He sailed - - (over the lake.)
16. They travelled- - (over all the earth.)
17. The cap was - - (over his face.)
18. We put cloths - - (over his hand.)
19. Spread a counterpane (over us.)
20. The water was
21. The snow was -
(over his head,")
(over his boots.)
C0NWGTION OP NEPOECI^DS. 22D
22. " Devout men carried
Stephen to his burial,
and mada great la-
mentation - ^ (over him.")
1 . He remained with me (over Sunday.)
2. ** He kept it fresh - fover winter.")
3. Will you stay - - (overnight?)
4. "They prepared for
each day - - - (over night.")
1. Christianity has ad-
vantages- - - (over every other religion.)
2. Has John an advan-
tage - - - (over Joseph ?)
3. " Young Pallas shone
conspicuous - - (o'er the rest.")
4. What advantages has
learning - . - - (over ignorance ?)
5. What advantages has
Texas - - - (over the United States ?)
6.^ Who put thee - - (over us ?)
7. "I will make thee
ruler - - - (over many things.")
8. " Thou shalt be - (over my house.")
9. " Parents watch - (over their children;")
10. '* His tender mercies
are-, - -> - (over all his works.")
11. " Dost thou not watch (over mjj sin T")
PAST. — Exercises.
1. He was then - - (past the true line.)
2. It is^ow - - ' (past ten) o^ clock.
3. He was then - - (past feeling.)
4. He is now - • - fpast recovery.
5. He was then - - (past cure.)
230 CONDICTION OP NEFOECLADS.
THROUGH.— Exercises.
1. He pulled the thread ^through the eye) of the needle.
2. The breath comes - (through the glottis) of the wind-
pipe.
3. "He went - - (through the land) of Judea to Je-
rusalem.''*
4. The deer ran - - (through the forest.)
5. Fishes swim - - f through the water.)
6. He bored - - (through the log.)
7. They passed - - (through the gate.)
8. They came - - (through the canal.)
9. All business must pass (through his hands.)
10. He remained - - (through the night.)
11. I will go - - - (through this business.)
12. He has gone - - (through many hardships.)
13. They went - - {Xhxoxx^ ihe city) in search of their
friend.
14. " Their tongue walketh (through the earth.") Ps. Ixxxiii.
1. By grace are ye saved (through faith.)
2. "It will bud - - (through the scent) o/" t^afer."
3. " Sanctify them - (through thy truth.")
4. " The gift of God is
eternal life - - (through Jesus Christ.")
5. But some of them
said, He casteth out
devils - - - (through Beelzebub.)
6. He slew his brother - (through thirst) for gold.
7. He sold his country - (through a false ambition.)
8. We see things - - (through the medium) of the eye.
9. The crime was disco-
vered - - - (through the folly) of the offender.
10. An artery is a vessel - (through which) ^Ae blood is con-
veyed from the heart to all parts of the animal body.
11. A vein is a vessel - (through which) the blood is re.
turned to the heart.
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS. 231
THROUGHOUT.—ExERcisEs.
1. This measure was ap-
proved - - - (throughout the country.)
2. This is a practice - (throughout France.)
3. He has been consist-
ent - - - (throughout his political course.)
TO, UNTO.— Exercises.
1. John went - - (to church.)
2. "John is equal - Tto his brother) m ^a/en^s."
3. Six units are equal - ao half) of one dozen,
4. "He is going - - (to a trade.")
5. They are rising - (to honour.)
6. This business is suited (to his health.)
7. " She has a husband - (to her mind.")
[]She has a husband] {who is adapted) (to her mind }
8. These remarks were
addressed - - (to a large audience.)
9. " They pledge their
honour - - - (to you.")
10. " Go, buckle - - (to the law.")
11. Give yourself wholly (to it.)
12. Add virtue - - (to your faith.)
13. "They met us - - (to the number) of three hundredJ^
14. Six is - - 'ho twelve) what twenty
15. is - - - - (to forty.)
16. They were engaged man (to man.)
17. "It is ten - - {io ono) that he will fail ^
18. " Few of the Esqui-
maux can count - (to ten.")
19. " The prince was flat-
tered - - - (to his ruin.")
20. Shave the end down - (to a point.)
21. The man was crowded (to death.)
22. " He painted her - (to the life.")
23. "This is it - - (to a hair.")
24. " He is alive - - (to the sufiierings) of his children***
25. We will keep this seat (to ourselves.)
26. " This is the key - (to that door.")
27. It is sweet - - (to the taste V
232 CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
28. I have his word - (to the contrary.)
29. "Marks, and points out
each man of us - (to slaughter.")
30. *' He is deaf - - (to our cries) for relief,'^
31. He has a strong dislike (to Mr. Jones.)
32. The Scriptures say - (to the sinner,) " Now is the day
of salvation.^^
TOWARD, TOWARDS.— Exercises.
1. He rode - - - (toward London.)
2. The men came- - (towards me.)
3. He looked - - (towards his sister.)
4. "He set his face - (toward the wilderness.")
5. " His eye shall be evil (towards his brother.")
6. His conscience is void
of offence - - (toward God,)
7. and - - - - (toward men.)
8. " Thou hast love - (toward all the saints.")
9. " Hast thou faith - (toward? God?")
10. He gave five dollars - (towards the sum.)
11. "This is the first
alarm which England
received - - - (toward any trouble.")
Clarendon.
12. I am - - - (towards nine years) old, — Swift.
UNDER.— Exercises.
1. He stood - - Tunder the umbrella.)
2. Henry was carried - (under the ice.)
3. The iron is - - (underwater.)
4. These creatures live - (underground.) ^'^ ''''.; ;
5. James sat - - (under Sie brow) ofd'MH,
6. It is not like any other
thing - - (under the heavens.)
7. We found him walk-
ing . ' - (under a heavy load.) ,
8. The whole duty bf
man may be treated of (under the head) of Religion.
CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS. 233
9. ** TTie duke may be
mentioned - - (under the double capacity) o/'a/)ocf
and a divined — Felton.
] They are - - (under our laws.)
2. He entered his office Sunder these conditions.)
3. Yet he does this - (under the name) oi friendship,
4. This argument was
evaded - - f under som6 plausible distinctions.)
5. Joseph is - - (under a tutor.)
6. These colonies are - (under the British government.)
7. James is now - - (under a guardian.)
8. - - - - (" Under God,) this is our only
safety."
9. They are all - - (under sin.)
10. He is - - - (under some restraint.)
11. What man is not - (under condemnation?)
12. He was - - - (under favour) q/* ^Ae Prmcc.
13. Saints particularly are (under the blessings) of God.
14 We live - - - (under the gospel dispensation.)
15. " Nuns are - - (under vows) q^ cAari/y."
16. " We should have for-
titude - - - (under the evils) o/'/i/e.
17. " We should behave
like Christians - (under reproaches.")
18. " Have patience - (under pain.")
19. He was then - - (under the penalties) of the law.
20. I live - - - (under extreme oppression.)
21. The atrmy was - (under the command) of Genera,
Jackson.
22. The American revolu-
tion commenced - (under the administration) of Lord
North.
23. Here is a deed - (mider his hand,)
24. and - - - (under his seal.)
25. *' He has left us evi-
dence - - - (under his own hand.")
26. " Morpheus is repre-
sented - - - (under the figure) q/' a 601/ as/eep
27. He writes - - (under the name) of Locke. 20*
234 ^JONDYCT'ION Of IN'EPOECLADS.
28. " These men trade - (under the firm) of Wright Sf (?»
29. For I am a man - Tunder authority,)
30. having soldiers - (under me.)
31. The ship was then - (under way.)
32. " It was too great an
honour for any man (under a duke.")
33. A lieutenancy is an
office which is - (under a captaincy;)
34. " The effect of medi-
cine is sometimes - (under its natural strength.*')
35. " There are parishes
in England - - (under forty pounds) a year"
36. ** He left three sons - (under age.")
37. " They would not sell
the horse - - (under forty pounds.")
38. ^^ Several young men , .
could never leave the
pulpit - - - (under half) , a dozen conceits,^
Swift.
'UNDERNEATH.— Exercises.
1. "He found it - - ^underneath this stone.")
2. *' The mole runneth - (underneath ,,.'*)
UP. — Exercises.
1. " He is now - - (up the river.")
2. " The squirrel is - (up the tree.")
1. " He was walking - (up the hill.")
2. " The squirrel ran - (up the tree.")
UPON.^ — Exercises.
1. James was seated - (upon a high hill.)
2. I was then - - (upon the house.)
3. Was he then - - (upon his horse?)
4. His hat was - - (upon his head.)
5. " He has his coat - (upon his back.")
6. The basket hung - (upon his arm.)
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS. 235
7. We are now - - (upon battle ground.)
8. The gun was - - fupon his shoulder.)
9. He had a ring - - (upon his fore-finger.)
10. I put my hand - - (upon his shoulder.)
11. Lean your head - ^upon ray arm.)
12 I have often been - (upon these waters.)
13. I have never seen finer
wings - - - (upon any bird.)
14. He struck - - (upon the table) with his hand.
16. They struck - - (upon the ground.)
16. They beat - - (upon the house) ^i7/ zV/c//.
17. They struck him - (upon his head.)
18. " The rain came down (upon us) in torrents,**
19. If you expect punc-
tuality - - - (upon our part,)
20. I tmst that you will be
punctual - - (on yours.)
21. He is - - - (upon the other side) o/" Me nvcr.
22. He is now - - (upon this sid^) o///ic i>e/at^are.
23. I have made an im-
provement - - (upon that lamp.)
24. I performed an opera-
tion - - - (upon his arm.)
25. " The Philistines be (upon thee,) Samson.''
26. They came out - (upon me) loith clubs.
27. I am engaged - - (upon tliis job,) to-day.
28. They were discharged (upon the first day) of June.
29. " You do this - - (upon pain) of death.''
30. What was their con-
duct - - - (upon this occasion?)
31. They will have com-
passion - - - (upon him.)
32. John will retire - (upon our approach.)
33. He was - - - (upon the look-out) /or Me */iip.
34. They were - - (upon the alert) all night
35. He is - - - (upon duty.)
36. He was - - - (upOn guard.)
37. They were - - (upon their guard.)
236 CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
38. He appears - - Tupon all public occasions.) *
39. We find ruin - - (upon ruin.)
40. Men meet with loss - (upon loss.)
41. He suffered affliction (upon affliction.)
42. The thunder came peal (upon peal.)
43. He saw heap - - (upon heap.)
44. He came - - (upon a sudden.)
45. He came - - (upon an errand) q/* /o?;c.
46. The ship is - - (upon shore.) Not good-on is good.
47. My reflections - (upon your situation) have been
painful,
48. Consider well - - (upon the matter,) beforehand.
49. I have not thought
much . - - (upon the affair) since.
50. I shall not say a word (upon his treatment) toward me.
51.1 will retire, and dream (upon the thing.)
52. His mind seemed fixed (upon this one point.)
53. "He sent the officer r (upon a bold enterprise.")
54. The legislature is now (upon the banks.)
55. While I am - - (upon this subject,) / will remark.
56. I have given many
notes - - - (upon the condiction) of agnome-
clads.
57. Congress is now - Tupon the pre-emption act.)
58. This is a treatise - Tupon Texas.)
59. I have reflected much (upon this point) of the law in your
case.
60. Blackstone has written
much - - - (upon the common law.)
61. Who has written a
sound work - - (upon the laws) of nations 9
62. In his speech he en-
larged - - - (upon this part) of the theme.
63. The point - - (upon which) / desire to add one
word, is this.
64. He is bent - - (upon mischief.)
65. He is now - - (upon his way) home.
66. He was then - - (upon the road.)
67. He is - - - (upon the road) to fame.
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS. 237
68. Henry was - - (upon his way) to ruin.
69. He is always - - (upon the wing.)
70. He was - - - (upon the alert.)
71. The horse came - (upon the full jump.)
72. The horses were - (upon a hard trot.)
73. My horse was - (upon a slow walk.)
74. His horse was - - (upon a gallop.)
75. My father was - (upon my right side,)
76. and my brother - (upon my left.)
77. '* There is a village - (upon the Thames.")
78. ** Jefferson city is - (upon the Missouri river.")
79. James is - -(upon the other side.)
80. Joseph was - - (on the whig side.)
WITHIN.— Exercises.
1. There is no man - (within these walls.)
2. The pious man finds
happiness - - (within his Bible.)
3. John will return - (within a year.)
4. His attempt died - (within itself.)
5. " Keep your expenses (within your income.")
6. " The wound festers (within , , .")
7. " Ills from - - (within , , ) thy reason must
prevent.
ATWEEN.— Exercises.
1. *' Doe? all go right - (atween us?")
2. '* Is all right - - (atwixt him), and his Maker?^*
3. " The victim nailed - (atween two thieves.")
4. ** It came out from - (atwixt the two clefts) q/'^^crocA:.'
BETWEEN, BETWIXT.— Exercises.
1. There is a difference (between the two horses,)
2. There is a discord - (betwixt the two brothers.)
3. "Whatisthe distinction (between right,) and wrong 9^^
4. These two men hold
the land - - (between them.j
238 CONDICTION or NEPOECLADS.
5. He sat - - - (between two rocks.) I T%
6. The stream ran - (betwixt the two cities.)
7. I stood - - - (between him,) and thee.
8. "The nose is - - (betwixt the eyes.")
A GAINST.— Exercises.
1. *'Iam - - - (against your pillows.") -£^2r. xiii
2. "His hand will be - (against every man.") Gen. xvi.
3. "That is a decree - (against law,)
4. - - - - (against public opinion,)
5. and - - . (against reason itself.")
6. This horse ran - (against that , .)
7. Harrison ran - - ?against Van Buren.)
8. " The Whigs are - (against the Democrats.")
9. There are ten votes - (against nine.)
10. " The ship is - (against the mouth) of the river J*"*
11. Aaron lighted the
lamps over - - (against the candlestick.")
\_Num. viii.
12. He leans - - (against the wall.)
13. This change of mea-
sures is - - - (against us.)
14. The choice of officers
was - - - (against them.)
15. They should get good
wood - - - (against winter.)
16. All should lay up
something - - Tagainst time) of need.
17. " Urijahmade it - (against king Ahaz came from Da-
mascus.") 2 Kings xvi.
18. Cold water is good - (against a cold.)
10. " Alkalies are good - (against the heart-bum.")
CONDICTION OP NEPOBCLADS. 231>
20. "How will you
change horses?" —
I will put mine - (against yours.)
21. " I have endeavoured
to guard - - (against a cold.")
22. I shall guard - - (against thieves.)
23. He raised impious war (against the throne,)
24. and - - . (against the monarchy) of God,
FOR. — Exercises.
1. He gave a dollar - (for the knife.
2. (" For my life) I cannot understand
the man."
3. I will give my horse - (for yours.)
4. " He gave cattle - (for horses.")
5. " They gave him ten
stripes - - (for each offence.")
6. "And if any mischief
follow, then thou
shalt give life - - (for life,)
eye . . . (for eye,)
. tooth - - - (for tooth,)
9. hand - - - (for hand,)
10. foot - - - (for foot.") j^^ar.xxi.
11. "To give his life a
ransom - - - (for many.") Matt. xx.
12. " Or what shall a mart
give in exchange - (for his own soul ?") Mark viii.
13. This root is good - (for a cough.)
14. " Alkalies are good - (for the heart-burn.")
15. Every man should
provide clothing - (for winter.)
16. " She wrapped him
close - - - ^for , catching) coW."— Shak.
17. "And, - - - (for the time shall not seem te-
dious "V—'Shak.
240 CONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
18. " John will go where
he pleases - - (for all) me,'*''
[[John will go where] (he pleases) (for , ,
(, > , ' ) ( » ™e.)
19. " Joseph Boston may
be in Philadelphia, - (for any thing) that I know."
20. The roads are bad,
indeed, but - - (for all) that I shall go.
21. John acts - - ^for me.)
22. "He gave up the law (for divinity.")
23. He translated the
poem line - - (for line.)
24. It was a great sum - (for John) to give,
25. " It was young coun-
sel - - - |for these persons,)
26. and violent counsel - (for the matters.")
1. I have many appre-
hensions - - (for him.)
2.1 have no apprehen-
sions - - - (for myself.)
3. Thus much - - (for this trait)in the character off or.
4. " Thus much - - (for the progress) of the deluge."
5. I took him - - (for a good man.)
6. They were taken - (for brothers.)
7. " I hear - - (for certain,) and do speak ttk9
truth.'" — Sh;ak.
8. "He quivered with
his feet, and lay - (for dead.")' — Dryden.
9. We took you - - (for the President.)
10. " Let her go - - (for an ungrateful woman.")
\i. "I took this note - (for the messenger) of love^
12. " We sailed from Boston - - (for Texas.")
13. " We sailed from Peru - - ffor China.")
14. " We sailed directly - - - (for Genoa.")
15. It would be - - - - (for his health) fo ca^cr-
dse.
GONDICTION OF NEPOECLADS.
241
16. To be just is -
17. To withdraw would be
18. It would be
tire.
- Tfor the general good.)
- (for his honour.)
- (for his comfort) to re-
19. "He is able to walk - - - ^for aught) I know,**
20. (For aught) is generally
known, John Boston is honest.
21. " The President is in the city - (for aught) is known,**
22. I write - - - - - (for Mr. Adams.)
23. He works - - - - (for his brother.)
24. " For he loveth our nation ; and he
hath built a synagogue - - (for us.")
25. Will you carry this note - - (for me ?)
26. " I will go to Boston - - (for you) for ten dol-
lars,"
27. Is there a good reason
duct?
28. Is there a good cause
among men?
29. " But this argument does not make
30. " There is a natural, immutable,
and eternal reason
call virtue** and against that
(for this course) of con-
(for this distinction)
(for the defendant."}
(for that ,) which we
which we call vice.
\^ 4\*
31. I am
32 He was - - V
vernment.)
33. Is he
narchy?)
34. "Aristotle is - - -
35. In this country, every man is
36. and all - - - -
:.li
for a free trade.)
for a republican go-
37. Was this instrument made
38. Were men bom
39. as beasts are
- (for a limited mo-
- (for poetical justice.")
- (for himself,)
- (for the government.)
^ (for a knife?)
^ (forkings,^
- (for men ?)
31
243
CONDICTION OP NBP0KCLAP5.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
67.
58.
59.
60.
61.
63.
64,
ifto-ff. ^i
I went
He is ever waiting
good.)
" I am looking •
day."
I apply to this court
and - - -
He was sent to me
*' He wrote
Men generally write
I am ready - - -
I have prepared
He is now in search - .-•
Let him recur ^o antiquity -
Hats are rtiMe *
This coat is - - -
This glass is - - - .»
This knife is good - -
That knife is good -
The osier is good
and the poplar - - -
(for my book.)
(for some expected
(for my brother) every
for redress,)
for protection.)
for money,)
(for money.")
- (for fame.)
- (foryou.J
- (for you.)
flf (for arguments.)
T (fpr examples,)
7 mW .ma
fortheheai.)/^- -^^•
for John Boston.)
for that room.)
for pens.) ^
- (for nothing.)
-p (for twigs,) :^
- (for the mill.)
.r4:J4
(for me) to control the
^^i »c^:i.'(for America) to lead
to with-
*'Itisnot-
sear
It was reserved -
the world to democracy.
It was not - - - - (for Adam)
stand the temptation of the forbidden tree.
It was (for Christ) to redeem
the lost race.
It is not - - - - - (for me) /o dictate to
you, gentlemen.
It is not - - - - - (for him) ^oconfro/ me.
65. " Moral consideration can no way
move the sensible appetite, was . ,;f . >f g
it not - - - . - - (for the will.")i jy *g|*
66. He could not pay his debts, was ^ q^
it not - - - - (for his friends.)
67. I should go was it not - - (for my brothers.)
COKDICriON OF NEP0ECZ.AD9.
248
68.
70.
" He cried out -
He cannot pay -
means.
- (for anguish.")
- (for the want) of
("For this reason) I
- Tfor very wrath.")
- (for our unworthinesa,)
cannot believe the report."
71. " With fiery eyes sparkling
72. ** Thai which we
are afraid
73. to crave, our prayer is that God, - (for the wdrthiness) of
his Son would vouchsafe to grant."
4. The inhabitants suffered - - (for provision^,)
75. and (for wood.)
76. He was afraid - - - - {for to meet his op^io-
nent.)
77. " Henry travelled
gether,*'
78. They hold their offices
79. "They rode - - . *
80. His nod has decided all causes
- (for Uiree hours) fo-
- (for life.)
(for miles together.")
in Sicily
- (for these three years.
OF. — Exercises.
" This cloth is made -
This hat is made
This is a man - - -
" He is a man -
" John Brown is a man
" He is a man - - -
character.")
" The wickedness
is obvious."
"They are
" If he found any
10. He has a knowledge
11. "The foundations were made
" Th6 first foundation was
" The second
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
(of
(of
(of
(of
fof
good wool.")
fine fur.)
genius.)
decayed fortune.")
straw.")
an unblemished
- (of the human heart)
12.
13.
14.
was
-fof
-(of
-fof
-of
-fof
-of
this opinion.")
that way.")
man.)
precious stones.")
jasper.")
sapphire.")
Does he faithfully discharge the
duties (of his office ?")
244
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23,
24.
25.
26,
27,
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
"The state
happy condition,'*^
" This lad goes by the name
A binominal root is composed
*' They platted a crown
I saw a sea - - -
" They made clay
"Ye are - - -
He has a singular kind
Give me a loaf - - -
James got a loaf
Give me a pound
" I saw the body
♦' I live in the city - -
Henry lives in a house
- (of moral purity) h
of John.")
of two parts.)
of thorns.")
of glass.)
of the spittle.")
of this world.")
of nose.)
of bread.)
of sugar.)
of tea.)
- (of Samuel Jones.")
- /of Philadelphia.")
- (of stone.)
" Language is the principal vehicle (of thought.**)
GooLD Brown's Grammar.
Where did he get this amount -
There is a number - - -
There was a family - - -
There was a convention
There is a society - - -
Should there not be a convention -
There was an assemblage -
There is a large collection -
Three individuals
Four , - - -
turned.
A company - - -
was formed.
A company - - -
(of cash?)
(of men) here.
of five persons.)
of Pennsylvanians.)
of ladies.)
of nations I)
of boys) in the street.
of water) here.
- (of the jury) are out.
- (of the company) re-
- (of thirty individuals)
- (of thirty individuals)
- (of Philadelphia,) was
- (of business.)
- (of English Syntax.)
- (of the planetary sya-
sent.
This is a matter
This book is a system
" A part - * - -
tern) can he seen, only by the aid of a telescope.''^
He has paper - - - - (of every kind.)
They have hats - - - (of all descriptions..)
He lives in a singular kind - - (of house.)
I will call in the course - - (of the day )
€€JNPIOTKrW 0¥ IfEFOECLABS.
^45
60. " This child is the very picture - (of his mother.")
51. This is a portrait - * - (of John Banks.)
52. " John went to Boston in the 3nBar (of 1840.")
53. His conduct was a course
54. A system * - -
55. *' We have toiled all -
caught nothing."
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
09.
70.
71.
fof deceit.)
[of general education*)
- (of the night,) and have
56. '* He was led up
57. " Being forty days tempted
iv. 2.
58. ** And ye shall be hated
' r name's sake."
"8§. *^My house shall be called
house of prayer."
60. *• They were baptized
(of the Spirit.")
(of
61. "Salvation is -
62. ** This is the grammar
63. " This lad is the son -
the devil.") Luke
- (of all men) for my
-'(df all nations) the
-,(^hn.")
- (of the Lord.")
- (of L. Murray.")
- (lof Mr. Jones.")
" Mr. Jones is the father - . - (of this lad.")
Mrs. Mary Davis is the mother - (of Miss Jane Davis.)
" Mr. Jones is the father - - (of this lad.")
" Miss Mary Davis is the mother (of Miss Jane Davis.")
Mr. James is \ht father - - (of three sons,) and
(of two daughters.)
General Harrison is President - fof the United States.)
*' John is thefero^Acr- - - (of James.")
72. Mr. John Davis is the grandfather (of this young lad.)
(of Mr. Sanderson.)
(of James Harper.")
(of Isaac")
73. Mr. Nathans was the uncle
74. ^' This lady was the aurtt -
75. "Abraham wais the father -
76. ** David R. Porter is "now
, . Governor - - ' -
i*t. John B. Purcell is Bishop -
78. This gentleman is a Bishop
79. Henry Jones is a iherchdnt
80. *' Joseph Hewet \i the pupil
81. I am the feather
82. jaftied is the apprentice
the
*► (of Pennsylvania.")
- (of Cincinnati.)
- (dfthe Episcopal church.)
- (of Philadelphia.)
- (of John Foster.")
(of -
41"
this school.)
. (of tw6 masters.)
246
CONBICTION 01* NXFOSeULDS.
83. This house is the property
84. The colour - - -
85. ''The length -
86. Th.e buttons - - ■
87. The eyes - - - .
88. Is the man - - -
89. "The birds
manJ'^
90. The warmth -
ceptible.
91. "The/z/e
92. ''The foundation -
stoneJ*^
93. The captain - - -
94. ** Four individuals -
turned,''
' (of Jane Foster.)
- ^of that cloth is good )
- (of the stick is great.")
- (of the coat) are silver,
- fof the buttons)
(of this coat.)
- fof the house) mMtw.^
- (of the air) are for
- (of the water) is per-
- Yof man) is short.'"
- (of the house) was
- (of the ship) was lost,
- (of the company) rC'
95. John went - - - - (of himself.)
96. *' As the branch cannot bear fruit (of itself.")
97. God is the author of the universe (of himself.)
98. God - - - -
author of the universe.
99. I - - -
there.
100. I was there -
101. John - '- - .
at court.
102. John was at court -
-(
himself) is the
myself) was
- (of myself.)
- ( , himself) was
• (of himself.)
" He spake
Did John say any thing
103
104
105. *' I shall speak
106. He will give a history
107. He spake very highly
')
- (of his parents.
- (of himself?)
- (of that affair) soon,'^
- (of the Jews.)
- (of the services) which
Jackson had rendered his country.
108. *' And he charged them that they
should tell no man - - (of it.")
109. " These gentlemen told me - (of it.")
110. " I have heard - - - - (of his troubles.")
CONDICTION OV NEPOECLADS, 247
111. ♦* I have been informed - - ( , that) the
President is in the city." (©/"that.)
112. Nothing was said - - - (of his sons.)
113. He spake well - - - (of Thomas Jefferson.)
114. " When Pilate heard - - (of Galilee,) he asked,
whether the man was a Galilean."
115. " And when ye shall hear - (of wars,)
116. "and rumours - - - (of wars,) be ye not
troubled. ^^
117. "Wherefore that field shall be
called the field - - - (of blood.")
118. All strangers were buried in the
field (of blood.)
119. This is the field - - - (of battle.") for.
120. " Peter and John went up at the
hour fof prayer.") for.
121. " After this there was a feast - (of the passover.")
122. ** The heavens must receive him
until the times - - - (of the restitution) of
all things.''^
123. This man is worthy - - (of great praise.)
124. " This deed is t^or/Ay - - [of great praise.")
125. This subject is worthy - - fof close attention.)
126. That affair is worthy - - (of much attention.)
127. " This fellow is not worthy - (of our notice.")
128. Although man is vile, his soul *
was deemed toor^At/ - - (of Christ's own blood.)
129. That hat is worth - - - ^ , ten dollars.)
130. This deed is worthy - - (of high commenda-
tion.)
131. The destruction - - - (of this race) was in-
stant.
132. This course is obviously subver-
sive fof sound morals.)
133. This climate is destructive - (of health.)
134. The destruction - - - (of this race) was un-
expected.
248
CONDlCttON Of NEPOECLADB.
135. He is sick . - - -
136. I am quite tired - - -
137. I am tired - - - -
138. The room is full -
139. The Word was made flesh, and
dwelt among us - - full
and _ - - - full
*' All ye shall be offended
night.''
142. I am glad - - - -
143. He was impatient - ' - ' -
"For - - - ,;.-.J -
release one at the feast.
For he - - - - -
'* He who first stepped in was
Cured - - - - -
he had.''
"He preached the remission -
'• He who first stepped in after
the troubling of the water, was
cured - -
he had."
*♦ He preached the forgiveness
140.
141.
144.
145.
146.
147.
148.
149.
(of a cold.)
(of this subject.)
(of your talk.)
(of smoke.)
(of grace,)
(of truth.)
(because-of me) this
(of it.)
fof these restraints.)
(of necessity) he must
(of necessity) mws/ go,
(of 'whatever/ disease)
- ■ ..^ -. ■ - mi
(of sins,) to aU"
- (of whatiioever disease)
(of I
to all.
150. (««df a trtith) / say
unto you, this man went down
justified rather than the first."
151. I say unto you - - - (of a truth) that no
good will come of this thing.
192. ** Much evil will come
153. ** No good will come
154. *« Will any good come
155.
156.
157.
158.
160.
•' I have known him
He has been knowh to us -
He went - - -
" He is well - -
"Henry is not well
- (ofthat iilieasure.**)
- (of it.")
- (of him.")
- (of a child.")
- (of a long time.)
- (of a Saturday.)
. (of late.")
- (of late years.")
'¥.
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
249
1. "They came out
2. I went directly out -
3. Is not this man out
4. These very pins came out -
5. Move these chairs out
(of Egypt.")
of the house.)
of the road ?)
(of his mouth.)
(of my way.)
WITH.— -Exercises.
1. He writes letters - - -
2. " And the angel measured the city
3. Is not his conscience seared
4. He, like others, eats -
5. The rust of iron may be eaten off
6. " She anointed his feet with oint-
ment, and wiped them -
7. The gentleman convinced me
8. She sewed these pieces
9. Sew the buttons - - -
10. The coat was made - - -
11. He paid the demand - - -
12. They deceived me - - -
13. What went ye out to see — a reed
shaken - - - -
14. They raised their bread
15. The man was cured - - -
(See example 6.)
16. Judas betrayed him - - -
17. Men become learned - - -
18. Fire is extinguished - - -
19. " They are distressed
20. Martin was elevated -
21. The grass was injured
22. He is afflicted -
23. He is now ill -
24. Make me a coat
25. He purchased a farm -
26. That lad has a knife -
27. He found a silver watch
28. He has a steel watch-chain-
(with a pen.)
(with a golden reed.")
(with a hot iron ?)
(with his teeth.)
(with vinegar,)
(with her hair.")
with his arguments.)
with a needle.)
with strong thread.)
with silk.)
(with this money.)
(with rare pretensions.)
(with the wind ?)
(with yeast.)
(with this ointment.)
(with a kiss.)
(with study.)
(with water.)
(with pain.")
(with joy.)
(with the frost.)
(with poverty.)
(with a fever.)
(with buttons.)
(with a house.)
(with four blades.)
(with a gold chain.)
(with a gold key.)
250
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS
29. My teacher gave me this book -
30. My father sends you this note -
31. I want a cloth - - - -
32. He has a cane - - - -
33. Give the word - - -
34. I like books - - - -
35. He wrote - - -
36. They will return
37. I want a Geography - - -
38. He shot six birds - - -
39. He may peruse this book -
40. I have returned - - -
41. We shall sketch the contents of
this chapter - - - -
42. " The first beast was like a lion -
43. " I saw a beast like a bear -
44. John speaks of a leopard-like
monster - - - -
and- - - - . .
its back.
45. That man was in town
46. He has built him a house -
(with good advice.)
(with his respects.)
(with a black colour.)
(with an ivory head.)
(with its import.)
(with a good margin.)
(with great accuracy.)
(with reluctance.)
(with an atlas.)
(with black feathers.)
f with great advantage.)
(with an apology.)
(with gteat rapidity.)
(with eagle's wings.")
(with three ribs) in its
(with four heads,)
(with four wings) upon
(with his two servants.)
(with an iron roof.)
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
The house was filled -
"And she anointed his feet -
"And the bottles were filled
The meaisure iis now filled -
" Henry was filled -
Henry was sitting - - -
house.
When I said that, John was
The gentleman travelled
I went to Boston
56. " This apple grew upon the same
[with smoke.)
[with ointment.*') ^
■with air.")
- (with corn.)
- (with fear.")
• fwitfi: me,) in my
- (with us.)
- {with me) to Boston.
- (with my brother.)
branch
57. That man was in town
Ex. 45.
(with that.")
- (with his wife.)
See
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
251
58. r iiKe to live
59, There is no living
60. He corresponds
61. " The connection of one piece
is obvious." ■
" The connection of the child
close."
The relation of one brother
is tender.
'* The connection of a brother
tender.^*
The relation of sixty
vious.
62
63.
64
65
" (with such neighbours.)
- (with such a man.)
- (with his brother.)
- (with the other pi^ce,)
- (with hig pareptSi) is
- (with another brother,)
- (with a sister) is also
- (with six tens) is oh-
66.
The relation of six - - - (with five) is obvious.
67.
" He compared pleasure - - (with pain.")
68.
" This cloth compares well, - (with that cloth.")
69.
Let us compare his arguments - (with reason.)
70.
I would trust him - - - (with my horse.)
71.
James trusted his brother - - (
with the secret.)
72.
Was any of the money found - j
[with the thief?)'
73.
Have you a knife - - - (
[with you?)
74.
They found the silver cup - - (
Jwith Joseph.)
Jwith goods.)
75.
I will trust him - - - - (
76.
I am here
(with power) to act.
77.
Jaknes went ; but he went - - (with your permission.)
78.
'* He came - - - - (
[with full authority) to
%-iZ
^iapt.*? ' ^^^
79.
John stole the apples - - - |
[with his brother.)
80.
"And there was a great company
^of publicans, s^nd others, that
'sat down - - - - i
with him.")
81.
I work at shoe-making
with my brother.)
82.
I Jive. - - - - - 1
with my sister.)
83.
This slave lives - " - ~ - i
with, his master.)
84.
Sarah boards - - - - (
with Mrs. Davis.)
85.
John studied his lesson " -
(with me.)
86.
j«mes went through college - |
[with my brother.)
252 CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
87. The Indians shot John - - (with his brother.)
88. "John - - - - - (with his horse) was
drowned."
89. " Must our fortunes be twisted - (with your sinking
90. Our condition is so connected - (with yours) that we
must sink, or swim together.
91. Henry purchased a horse - - (with a saddle.)
92. " Simon Peter {writes) to them
that have obtained the like pre-
cious faith - - - - (with us.")
93. " He will lie - - - (with any man) /iv-
iw^." Against.
94. " The champions fought - - (with each other) an
hour." Against.
95. These men have long struggled - (with adversity.)
Against.
96. This horse ran - - - - (with that .)
Against.
97. " Fear not, for I am - - - (with thee.")
[Gen. xxvi,
98. " Go — and may the Lord be - (with you."^
99. " He fell not, for the Lord was - (with him.")
100. "I went to Boston - - - (with a view) to see
him."
101. ** Henry came to my house - (with a view) to see
me."
102. " Did he seem to act " - (with a determination)
to succeed?"
103. " Has Mr. Jones done any thing (with respect) to his
claim ?"
104. " Henry Davis is resolved to do
nothing - - - - (with regard) to his
own election."
105. John acquainted his mother - f with his success.)
106. ** Mr. Webster is familiar - (with all our constitu-
tions.")
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS. 253
107. " He was a man of sorrow, and
acquainted - - - - (with grief.")
108. »* Reason would that I should
bear - - - - - (with you.")
[Acts xviii.
109. " Shall not God avenge his elect,
though he bear long - - (with them ?")
[Luke xviii.
110. " Would to God you could bear (with me,) a little.
111. Henry Davis studied law - - (with Daniel Webster.)
1 12. Mr. Joab Brace must have studied
grammar - - - - (with Lennie) ^imse//".
113. The professor of religion should
show in his daily intercourse
with men, that he has been - (with Christ.)
114. " From the statement of this wit-
ness, I presume that he has
been (with the defendant.")
115. (" With the Unitarian,) - - Christ is a mere man."
116. (With the Presbyterians,) - - Christ is God himself.
117. (" With the industrious man,) -there is generally
enough."
118. (" With the idle man,) - - there is generally too
little."
119. f" With him,)- - - - nothing is right."
120. r* With his brother,) - - nothing is wrong."
121. (" With the ancients,) - - tragedy was originally
a piece of religious worship."
122. (" With the Sioux Indians,) - dogs are beasts of bur-
den." ^
123. (" With all savage tribes,)^ - skins are converted into
. clothing." .^ ^km^^4^ -* ^-^
124. (•♦ With some people,) - - one remedy is em-
ployed for all diseases."
125. (" With a philosopher*) - - demonstration is joy."
126. (" With you,) - - - - the word of the Lord
has free course."
254 CQNPieTiQN or nepoeclads.
127. " This gentlemw had great
weight ----- (with the President.")
128. That circumstance had great
weight ----- ^with the jury.)
129. This argument had much influence (with the judge.)
130. No reasoning will have much
weight ----- (with the fool.)
131. These demonstrations had invin-
cible influence - - - (with those pagan phi-
losophers.)
132. **- 1 thought him an innocent man,
and (with this impression)
I did what I could to procure his pardon."
133. ** If any one should take up this
work (with the impression)
that he has met with another Murray's Grammar, &c."
Roswell C, Smithes Grammai:*
134. "He repUed, you are a dead
man; and - - - - (with this , ) dis-
charged his pistoV^
135,. Falstaff at that oak, shall meet - (with us.)— Shak.
136. "We met - - (with this gentleman) in ^os^on."
137. " We met - - (with rare things) on the way J**
138. " We met - - (with curiosities) everywhere,''*
m ■
139. "They met - - - - f with a fall) on ^Ac tee."
140. " They have met - - - (with heavy losses) at
sea,''*
141. How is business -^ -^^J^ - (with the Bostonians ?)
142. Is business brisk - %,- - (with you?)
143. Why is it that fruit tredijido n*!-
grow well - - W^ ■ (with us ?)
144. " Finally, brethren, pray for us, . %
that the word of the Lord may Tt
have free course, and beglori- T^''^
fied even m it is - - - (with you.")
r
CONDICTION OP NEPOECLADS.
255
1. " He is always -
2. " There is no living
3. " Henry is
4. "They are
Christ:'
5. " Henry stood -
6. " James was eating
7. "Eternity is -
- ^without money.**)
- (without thee.")
- (without a hat.")
- (without hope) %n
f without the gate.'*)
(without the door.";
(without our reach.**)
8. "The most advantageous terms from
the French, must end in our de-
struction > - - - (without the separa-
tion) of the two monarchies^'
9. " Men like to live
10. "Wise men will do right
- (without labour.")
- (without laws.)
11. That event may happen - - (without any danger.)
12. " That event cannot take place - (without damage) to
our interests."
13. They can live together
14. They cannot live together -
15. They cannot labour -
16. They have laboured -
- (without any difficulty.)
[without difficulty.)
without success.)
Vithout success.)
17. John came out -
(See example 3.)
(without his hat.)
/fU^P^
^
J>
^,x^^^^<~
c
I
4^ m. 4L
RETURN EDUCATION-PSVpOLOGY LIBRARY
TO^ ^ 9A0nTQlman Hall 642-4209
LOAN PERIOD 1
iiJlELO BONE RENEWALS
QUAHTCn LOAN
ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS
2- hour books must be renewed in person
Return to desk from which borrowed
DUE AS STAMPED BELOW
QUARTER LOAN Dl
E:
JUN2 51982
SUBJECT TO RECAI
L
JPR28REC'D-^
Ph
-
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY
FORM NO. DDIO, 5m, 3/80 BERKELEY, CA 94720
YB 36436
■■■^.^